Help Wiki - User contributions [en]

APS Bolex 16mm Reflex Operating Guide

2020-12-15T23:51:24Z

Williaas: /* Viewfinder */

[[file:bolexintrogif.gif]]

===Introduction===
'''[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/6/6c/Aps_BolexH16_edit.pdf Bolex H-16 Reflex Camera Operating Guide PDF]''' 
[[APS Bolex 16mm Reflex Proficiency Test]] 
 
{{#ev:vimeo|148556463|800|center|H-16 Bolex Reflex Tutorial}}
 
The Bolex H-16 Rex and H-16 SBM cameras are 16MM reflex cameras. The optical system permits through-the-lens viewing at all times. The self-threading allows easy loading of daylight spools. Camera features include single-frame filming, extended exposure, slow motion, backwind and a 133 ̊-145 ̊ angle variable shutter. Media Loan’s Advanced Production Services (APS) has a variety of Bolex H-16 cameras manufactured between 1960 and 1976. Although all have similar features, the controls vary slightly.

Also available for use with the Bolex cameras are zoom lenses, prime lenses, and an intervalometer as well as other accessories.
Care must be taken when using a Bolex because they are expensive and very difficult to replace.
*DO NOT subject the camera to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.
*DO NOT subject the camera to extreme heat or cold. Drastic temperature changes can cause condensation to occur inside the camera. Let the camera acclimate to the environment you are shooting in by letting it rest in the case with the case tabs opened but the lid closed for at least an hour.
*DO NOT touch the prism.
*DO NOT use excessive force or over tighten anything on the camera. 

'''''You are 100% financially responsible for repair and/or replacement in the event of damage or loss of the Bolex, as well as any other equipment checked out from Media Loan.'''''

===Viewfinder===
The Bolex H-16 viewfinder enables accurate focusing and framing, and allows you to estimate the depth of field.

The reflex prism deflects 20 - 25% of the light passing through the lens into the viewfinder system: only 75 – 80% of the light reaches the film plane. The quality of the light reaching the film is reduced by about 1/2 to 1/3 of an f-stop.

To compensate for the light reduction, Bolex has determined that '''the effective shutter speed for the H-16 camera is 1/80 of a second''' rather than the standard 1/65 of a second. Bolex produced lenses in two different versions up to 50mm in focal length. The first version (Non RX) was made for Non Reflex Bolex cameras but would work perfectly well on any other manufacturers cameras that didn't use a prism in its design. The second version was lenses made purely for use on Bolex Reflex cameras (H16 RX), which are designed to correct some very specific problems caused because there is a prism permanently in the light path always diverting 25% of the light inbound towards the lens to the viewfinder and the remaining 75% to the film. RX lenses aim to remove the two problems the prism causes.
# Light Loss: The RX lens is calibrated to pass 1/3 more light than the aperture markings on the barrel indicates. When using RX lenses with the H-16 camera, the effective shutter speed is back to 1/65 of a second. However when shooting modern negative film the difference is negligible.
# Spherical Aberration: The Bolex prisms causes the outer light rays from a lens to be bent at different angles to the central ones, so they don't converge at the same point, creating blurry images at the film plane. The RX lenses have been designed to counteract this aberration.

APS will provide you with RX lenses (designated after the name on the barrel of the lens), unless you request otherwise or no RX lenses are available. Make sure you know whether or not the lenses you are checking out are RX or non-RX. (Ask an APS employee to show you how to check the lens if necessary.) When using non-RX lenses of 50 mm or less, satisfactory results can be obtained when stopped down to f/8 or smaller.

{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Lens Type !!12fps
!16fps
!18fps
!24fps
!32fps
!48fps
!64fps!! Single-frame
|-
| Rx ||1/33rd of a second
|1/45th of a second
|1/50th of a second
|1/65th of a second
|1/90th of a second
|1/130th of a second
|1/180th of a second|| 1/30th of a second
|-
| Non-Rx ||1/40th of a second
|1/55th of a second
|1/60th of a second
|1/80th of a second
|1/110th of a second
|1/160th of a second
|1/220nd of a second|| 1/40th of a second
|}

==Anatomy==
[[file:bolexdiagram2.jpg|700px|right|thumb|Bolex Parts - Click to englarge]] 
# Diopter
# Diopter lock
# Eyecup
# MOT (engage motor)
# Spring lever
# 0 (disengage motor)
# Footage counter
# Winding crank
# Crank latch (behind)
# Douser
# Frame counter & knob
# Backwind
# Timed exposure
# Extended exposure knob
# Instantaneous exposure
# Frame rate selector
# STOP
# M (continuous)
# Release selector
# P (single frame)
# Variable shutter
# Turret
# Turret arm
# Release button
# Electric motor shaft

===Douser===
The douser (located on the reflex viewfinder) closes the eyepiece to keep light from reaching and fogging the film plane through the viewfinder. The douser is open when the lever is in the horizontal position and closed when in the vertical position. '''Close the douser whenever your eye is removed from the eyepiece to prevent film from fogging.'''

===Diopter Adjustment===
The diopter adjustment corrects the optical system to the operator’s eyesight and remains the same for all lenses on the camera. If you wear glasses, you can adjust the diopter to your eyesight and achieve accurate focus without your glasses. Always set the diopter to your eyesight (before filming).

====To set the diopter:====
#Turn the turret to expose the reflex prism (no lens in the taking position) or remove the cover of the bayonet mount.
#Point the camera at a light source.
#Unlock the diopter adjustment either by loosening the grooved ring around the viewfinder or the locking screw depending on the camera model.
#Adjust the viewfinder until the grain of the ground glass is perfectly sharp.
#Lock the diopter finger tight, but '''DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN.'''

===Turret Mount===
[[file:Bolex front.jpg|340px|left|thumb|Turret Mount Bolex]]
[[file:bolexgif2.gif]]
 

You can change from one lens to another easily by turning the turret. To turn the turret, be sure to use the silver fold away lever rather than handling the lenses. Doing so lessens the risk of accidentally changing the aperture and/or focus ring – or damaging the lenses and/or camera.

When using heavier lenses, such as telephoto or zoom lenses, the turret should be locked with a turret plug, marked with a red ring. Turret plugs go into the lowest lens cavity, when turret is in normal position.

For lighter
lenses, the turret lock on the camera should be sufficient for stabilizing the turret. This lock is located above the lens in the taking position and should be tightened before the lenses are in place. Place wide-angle lenses and the telephoto lenses opposite of each other on the turret so that the telephoto lens does not interfere with the field of the wide-angle lens.
To attach a lens, simply unscrew the turret cap and screw on the lens. You can have up to three lenses mounted at once on the turret mount. If using less than three lenses, make sure turret caps are secured in unused positions. ALWAYS keep loose turret caps and lens caps in the case to avoid losing them.

====Turret Mount Filters====
Cameras with a turret mount have a filter between the taking lens position and the reflex prism. The filter remains in place no matter which lens is used. When filming without a filter, an empty filter carrier should be left in the filter slot to prevent light from entering the camera through the slot and fogging the film. Make sure the carrier is located firmly within the slot and the correct filter is in place before shooting. An incorrect filter will either alter the color balance or exposure.

===Bayonet Mount===
[[file:Bolex bayonet front.jpg|400px|right|thumb|Bayonet Mount Bolex]]
The Bolex H-16 SBM camera has a single lens bayonet mount and is recommended for use with heavier lenses. 
To mount a lens:
# Turn the outer ring in the direction of the arrow (counter-clockwise if camera is facing you). Press the button on the bottom of the mount to move the screw into the open position where you will se the tabs of the cap.
# Lift the cap out of the mount and immediately place the lens mount in its place. Be careful not to touch the prism!
# Turn the ring clockwise to secure the lens mount in place and screw the lens into place.

To remove a lens and secure the bayonet mount cap:
# Unscrew the lens; replace lens caps and return to lens case.
# Turn outer ring as described above until tabs in lens ring are revealed.
# Remove the lens by pulling it out. DO NOT touch prism with fingers!
# Replace cap and secure by turning lens clockwise.

====Bayonet Mount Filters====
Filter insertion is from the control side of the camera. When not in use, the filter should be left in the storage position with the lever folded down and locked.
To insert a filter:
1. Slide the button down and insert the filter into the filter slot with the notched side down.
2. The first position is where the filter can be stored until needed. Fold the handle down and secure in notch.
To use the filter, it must be inserted all the way in to the filter slot so that it is in between the lens and the prism.
3. From the storage position, unfold the lever. Slide the button down and continue inserting the filter until it’s all the way in.

[[file:bolexfrontgif.gif]]

===Film Speeds===
The camera has film speeds ranging from 12 to 64 frames per second, except for the H-16 Reflex (the earliest model) which also has a setting for 8fps. To select the desired film speed, turn the control knob until the corresponding figure is opposite the red dot. When changing filming speeds, do not forget to alter exposure setting. (When changing from 24 to 48 by one stop and so forth.)

===Release Selector (AKA Side Release)===
The H-16 can be used for normal, continuous or single frame filming. The different operations are controlled by the release selector.
Normal – This method is suitable for most shooting situations. The camera runs as long as the operator depresses the front release button or pushes the release selector towards M.
Continuous – Push the release selector towards M until it clicks into place. The camera will continue running until the wind runs out or the release selector is pushed back to the STOP position.
Single frame – Use a cable release adapter to attach a cable release to the release selector. The adapter should be set so that the cable release pushes the release selector towards the P. Single frame exposures can be set for Instantaneous or Time Release. Turn the knob or lever to I to select Instantaneous. The effective shutter speed is 1/30 of a second. To select Time Release, set the knob’s guide mark or the lever to T. The shutter will stay open for as long as the release selector is set to P.

===Camera Motor===
The H-16 cameras have a spring drive motor. The motor can be disengaged to backwind the film. Most cameras that are available from APS can be used with a motor and therefore used with the Intervalometer for time-lapse animation or with electric motor for sync sound.
To wind the camera:
#Set the disengaging lever to MOT and the release selector to STOP. (If the release selector will not go to STOP, slightly wind the spring.)
#Lift the winding crank, which automatically engages the spindle, and set so that the slot in the handle is secured on the tab.
#Wind the spring counter-clockwise fully without forcing it.
#Fold the crank back and secure it on the latch on the lower body.

Fully wound, the motor will drive about 18 feet of film through the camera (about 28 seconds at 24fps).
Important: Never leave the camera wound during storage. This may ruin the spring. When running down the camera with no film loaded, set the film speed at the lowest setting.

===Variable Shutter===
The H-16 is equipped with a shutter capable of having its aperture varied whether or not the camera is running or stopped. This enables you to reduce exposure time without altering the camera running speed or f-stop. In bright light, the variable shutter can be used to reduce exposure, therefore eliminating the need for a neutral density filter.
The shutter may be locked in each of its five positions by pulling it out and pushing in when at the desired setting. The markings on the variable shutter correspond to the equivalent f-stop change (i.e., filming at the 1/2 mark is equivalent to stopping down by 1/2, at mark 2 equals closing down the lens diaphragm by 2 stops.) '''WHEN THE VARIABLE SHUTTER IS FULLY CLOSED, NO LIGHT ENTERS THE FILM PLANE '''
Warning: You can still see an image through the viewfinder if the variable shutter is closed.''' Some cameras show a triangular warning signal, but not all. Make sure you variable shutter is opened to the correct setting when filming.'''

[[file:shuttergif.gif]]

===Footage Counter===
The footage counter indicates how much film has been exposed. The counter will automatically reset when the lid is removed and will read FEET.
===Frame Counter===
The frame counter is helpful for lap dissolves, double exposures and animation. The frame counter adds frames in forward run and subtracts them in reverse. The upper dial counts single frames, 0 - 50. The lower dial totals in units of 50 frames, 0 - 1000.
===Loading the Camera===
The H-16 has automatic threading and loop forming capabilities making it an easy camera to load. When shooting at 24fps, there is an option for an audible click every second indicating that 8 inches of film has passed through the camera. This can be useful when timing a pan or zoom shot. For an audible click, move the audible signal select lever down when loading film; for no click place the lever in the 0 position.
====Before loading the camera:====
#Set the release selector to STOP.
#Set the disengaging lever to MOT.
#Set the frame rate to the desired camera speed.
#Wind the camera.
Open the camera lid. Visually inspect the film gate to make sure that it is not dirty. '''DO NOT use condensed air to blow dust from the camera.''' Cleaning the gate is a delicate procedure and you can cause irreparable damage if you do not do it correctly. Cameras are inspected and cleaned when they are returned to Media Loan so the camera you check out should be ready for filming. Use care when loading the camera so that you do not inadvertently get hair or debris inside which could ruin your film. Make sure your hands are clean before loading film or otherwise poking about inside the camera.

====Loading the Camera====
When loading the Bolex, make sure to go through the following steps: 

#Check that the pressure plate is locked so that it cannot open. The film will jam at this point if the plate is not closed.
#Close the loop formers by moving the control lever down so that it is parallel to the pressure plate.
#Remove the empty daylight spool from its spindle by pressing the ejector. This will be your take-up spool. (The spool can pop out so block it with your hand.)
#Place the loaded daylight spool on the upper spindle. The film should come off in the direction of the engraved arrow. At the film gate, the emulsion should always face towards the front of the camera.
#Using the film end located at the bottom of the camera, clip the film end.
#Insert film end in the top feed sprocket and start the camera motor by depressing the front release button.
#The film is automatically threaded through the gate. If you need to adjust the film, you can spread the sprocket guides by carefully pushing the sprocket guide in from the sprocket wheels.
#Continue to run the film until about 12 inches have run through the drive mechanism.
#Open the loop formers by pressing the button on the lever located on the sprocket/gate assembly.
#Insert the film end into the take-up spool in the direction of the engraved arrow. Place the spool on the lower spindle and take up any slack by hand.
#Run the camera again for several seconds, listening to make sure the film is threaded properly. Check that the film is advancing properly and that the loops do not scrape the body.
#Replace the lid and lock.
#The footage counter will be reset. Run the camera until the counter reads 0. This indicates the film leader has been taken up and the camera is ready to be used.
'''Film can be loaded in light, but subdued light is best.'''

===Lap Dissolve===
Superimposing a fade-in on a fade-out makes a lap dissolve so that one picture gradually disappears as the next gradually appears. (This is also known as a cross-dissolve.) This allows for a smooth transition during which the picture brightness scarcely varies. To produce a lap dissolve:
#Close the first shot in a sequence with a fade out. When beginning to close down the variable shutter, note what frame you are at in the frame counter. Alternatively, time how long it takes you to reach the closed position from the start of the fade and stop filming.
#Lock the variable shutter in the closed position.
#Disengage the motor by setting the selector to 0.
#Set the release selector to M.
#Close the douser if not already closed by moving it into the vertical position.
#Cap the lens.
#Using the backwind key, rewind the film until the frame counter indicates the duration of the fade out.
#Move the release selector to the STOP position.
#Frame the second sequence to be filmed.
#As you begin filming by pressing the release selector to M, begin the fade in by moving the variable shutter smoothly to the open position.
#Lock the variable shutter into the open position.
The Rex-o-fader is an accessory that can help with smooth fades and is available at APS. Ask an APS employee to show you how to attach and use it if you decide to check it out with a Bolex.

==ACCESSORIES==
[[file:bolexaccessories.jpg|400px|right|thumb|Bolex Accessories: cable release & adapter, filter kit, light meter, backwind]]
There are many accessory options for the Bolex. You must include these on your APS workorder for them to be added to your reservation as none of these items automatically come with the camera.

* Lenses: wide, standard, telephoto, and zoom
* Light meter: measure the light in a scene to set the proper exposure.
* Backwind: use this to rewind your film in the Bolex for double exposures, etc
* Cable release & adapter: use to take pictures, such as for timelapse animation on the Bolex.
* Filter kit: changes the contrast of a scene, among other effects. See the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Bolex_Filter_Kit_Quick_Guide filter kit guide] for a full explanation. 

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Canon Rebel Proficiency Test

2020-11-16T21:47:10Z

Williaas:

=== WRITTEN TEST ===
<big>Answers may be found in the [[Canon Rebel XT / XSi Operating Guide]] and [[Canon Rebel T1i/T2i Operating Guide]]. Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. Call 867-6253 if you have any questions.</big>
<big>
# Describe at least one method to adjust the three exposure settings: aperture, ISO and shutter speed.
# What the Av, Tv, P, and M icons on the mode dial stand for and what do they mean?
# When setting the Mode Dial to Full Auto, what three exposure variables are set?
# What are the two switches that can be found on most lenses and what do they control?
# How do you activate Live View and what does it do?
# How do you change white balance settings in the menu to obtain optimum color rendering?
# What does the "Q" button do?
# Name three things that might permanently damage this camera.
# If you check out a camera and it is lost, stolen or damaged, who is 100% responsible for the replacement costs of it?
</big>

=== OPERATIONAL PROFICIENCY ===
<big>To be done during your scheduled proficiency.</big>
<big>
# Remove the camera from the case and identify all controls and parts.
# Correctly identify the memory card and format the card.
# Describe the use of the menu button.
# Set camera to manual focusing.
# Demonstrate how to change the image resolution.
# Demonstrate how to set proper exposure.
# Set camera on tripod correctly and use the camera to capture a couple of still images or record video.
# Playback the still images or video.
# Set up a battery to be charged.
# Pack the camera back in its case.
</big>
[[category:Media Loan]]

Interns- Media Pedagogy

2020-11-05T19:40:38Z

Williaas: /* Final Tips for Teaching Students or Each Other */

== Pedagogy ==
* '''Pedagogy''' is a method and practice of teaching.
* '''Media pedagogy''' includes necessary changes to traditional pedagogy.
* Media pedagogy has a lot in common with '''constructivist theory''' in education.
* '''Constructivism''' is based on research for cognitive psychology, and suggests that people learn by constructing their own knowledge through an active learning process rather than simply absorbing knowledge directly from some other source.
* It took deep reforms in education recognize that knowledge is ''constructed'' by the student not ''given'' or ''delivered'' by teachers.
* Because technology is always changing, media pedagogy presents knowledge as problematic rather than fixed.
* On the staff side, media pedagogy is less content driven and instead based more on problem-solving.
* This educational approach promotes higher order thinking skills and the development critical analysis, metacognition, and reflection, often through creation, editing, and “publishing.”
* In media instruction, the continually changing nature of medium pushes its instructors to not just be users of technology, but co-creators of media work.

===== With an emphasis on '''student-centered education''', it is critical to think about the student population. =====
At a fundamental level curriculum should be '''relevant''' and '''diverse''', which requires an awareness of student interests and needs.

'''What groups of students do you get to know and how?'''

Staff can be at a disadvantage for this. Faculty get so much more time with students. The Multimedia Lab provides a unique opportunity for this, but we need help from faculty to get to know their students prior to workshops.

==== Some major, but certainly not all, categories of student diversity that we will want to hold in our minds during all of our instruction are: ====

== Racial and Ethnic Identity: ==
* Students identify with many different cultures and ways of looking at the world.
* As an educator, is paramount to learn about student background and expectations.
* Recognition of racial and ethnic differences provide an understanding for more effective instruction.

== Cultural Pluralism ==
* Cultural Pluralism rejects both '''cultural assimilation''' (the process of incorporating an immigrant group into mainstream culture) and '''separatism''' (cultural groups should maintain their own identity without trying to fit into an overall American culture), instead each subculture maintains its own individuality while contributing to the whole. The goal is to create a sense of society’s fullness based on the unique strength of each of its parts--instead of a melting pot, a mosaic.
* Traditionally schools have been run for the benefit of those in the dominant culture, thereby excluding minority groups from receiving the full range of benefits.
* If a school was to support cultural pluralism, it would avoid dominance of a single culture. Faculty, staff, and administration would be diverse and would be minority role models for students to interact with.
* Curriculum would be filled with the histories and contributions of diverse groups.

=== Demographics at Evergreen: ===
For 2016:
* 29% enrollment for students of color
* 229 total faculty, 53 faculty of color
* 554 total staff, 124 staff of color

=== These numbers tell us the ideal of cultural pluralism is not in practice at our institution. So, what can we do? ===

== Multicultural Education ==
Multicultural Education is a response to economic inequality, racism, and sexism in American Culture.
It goals include: reducing prejudice, improving the academic achievement of minority students, building commitment to cultural pluralism, and incorporating minority groups’ perspectives into curriculum.
Multiculturalism comes out of the social justice movements 60s. It’s lead to things like single-group studies, like African American and women’s studies and curriculum that examines inequality and oppression and actions to remediate these inequalities.

=== What does this concept mean for our work? ===
Media is involved in the transmission of information, correct or incorrect, balanced or biased.
Representation in media--images, videos, sound. Who are the subjects you are showing, what artists are you mentioning? All curriculum is a choice.

Can we as a work group generate terminology that can replace problematic media terms that come out of the military, binary gendering, and racism?

With the acknowledgement that there is not equity between dominant and minority groups in education, should this change how you spend your time and attention with populations of students in workshops or on productions?

Promoting equity in the classroom does not necessarily mean treating all students equally. Though it does mean giving all students equal opportunities to succeed, it may also mean giving some students more encouragement in class or structuring your lessons in ways that promote greater participation from a wider number of students.

== Students with a primary language other than English: ==
4.6 million English language learners are enrolled in public schools, which is almost 10% of all students.

Some instructional Strategies for English language learner:

* Slow down your speech and use shorter sentences, present tense of words, synonyms, examples, gestures, and demonstrations.
* Avoid expressions or sayings that are only common in the United States.
* Use as many mediums as possible to convey information: oral, written, videos, teacher demonstration, student demonstration, etc.
* Give students enough time to process questions.
* Use metaphors and imagery for cues.

== Learning Styles ==
Some students enter college and thrive, others do not, for a whole host of reasons. Furthermore, students may not respond to your style teaching. One of the biggest challenges as a teacher is to provide a variety of learning experiences.

Psychologist Howard Gardner proposed that people have at least eight distinct intellectual capacities they use to approach problems and create products:
# Verbal-linguistic intelligence draws on the individual’s language skills, oral and written, to express what’s on the person’s mind and to understand other people.
# Logical-mathematical intelligence is a person’s ability to understand principles of some kind of causal system, like a scientist does, or to manipulate numbers, quantities, and operations, like a mathematician does.
# Spatial intelligence refers to the ability to represent the spatial world internally in the mind, like a chess player or sculptor.
# Bodily-kinesthetic intelligence is the capacity to use your whole body or parts of your body to solve a problem, make something, or put on some kind of production, like an athlete or performing artist.
# Musical intelligence is the capacity to “think” in music and to be able to hear patterns and recognize, remember, and manipulate them.
# Interpersonal intelligence is the ability to understand other people.
# Intrapersonal intelligence refers to having an understanding of yourself and knowing your preferences, capabilities, and deficiencies.
# Naturalist intelligence refers to the ability to discriminate among living things (plants and animals) and to have sensitivity towards features of the natural world.

Schools often emphasize curriculum that predominately targets '''linguistic''' and '''logical-mathematical''' tasks. Students who are strong in linguistic and logical-mathematical work are likely to succeed and feel achievement. This leaves many other students with strengths in these other areas to experience frustration or failure in the school environment.

==== What can we do? ====
Rather than labeling students as having a particular learning style, instruction should offer varied lessons that appeal to a range of strengths, abilities, and learning preferences over time.

Giving students choice can help. In an equipment proficiency, some students take diligent notes, so students draw visual representations of the lesson, other students focus on listening. There is also a large emphasis on the hands-on element to our work.

Teach instructional materials in multiple modes helps. Wiki articles, videos, spoken, demonstration, etc.

== Gender Identity & Sexual Identity: ==
* Men and women identifying individuals are raised differently even within the same families, and society has different expectations of them.
* Non-binary, Transgender, agender, and intersex students face even further assumptions, stereotypes, discriminations, and prejudices.
* Treating gender and sexual identity equitably is often a struggle for teachers.
* It is a critical to establish and maintain a safe and supportive environment LGBTQIA+ students.
* Educators must validate and affirm multiple expressions of sexuality and gender.

==== What are some things that can be done as an instructor to validate and affirm these multiple expressions in Media workshops? ====
Cover pronouns, and if you don’t know what pronoun someone uses, don’t assume.

The artists or subjects selected as examples from can represent the LGBTQIA+ community.

It’s important to be concise in both language and purpose when discussing student-advocacy. Being an advocate means more than just preventing discrimination. Never tolerate derogatory or belittling language in the classroom. Recognize the struggles of students, listen and display empathy, and provide a safe space for self-expression. Constantly examine the school’s climate to determine how the faculty and staff can improve inclusiveness for ALL students.

==== What are some specific hurtles in media with gender? ====
According to San Diego State's Center for the Study of Women in Television and Film, women made up just 7 percent of all directors on the top 250 films, a 2 percent decline from 2015.

Much of equipment is gendered, but terminology will only change if folks put in the effort to make the transformation. There are other industry standards that can replace gendered naming.

== Socioeconomic Background: ==
'''Socioeconomic Status (SES)''' encompasses not just income but also educational attainment, financial security, and subjective perceptions of social status and social class. Socioeconomic status can contain quality of life attributes as well as the opportunities and privileges afforded to people within society. Poverty, specifically, is not a single factor but rather is characterized by multiple physical and psychosocial stressors. The school systems in low-SES communities are often under-resourced, negatively affecting students’ academic progress and outcomes.

The success rate of low-income students in science, technology, engineering, and mathematics disciplines is much lower than that of students who do not come from underrepresented backgrounds.

According to the U.S. Census Bureau (2014), individuals within the top family income percentiles are 8 times more likely to obtain a bachelor’s degree by age 24 as compared to individuals from the lowest family income percentiles.

==== What does this mean for us? ====
Clearly, we’re not going to ask students what socioeconomic bracket they fall into, but we can’t except students to come into school with the same levels of exposure to technology. Media technology is expensive. We can't just assume a baseline of media knowledge and it is critical to offer supplemental support to students that may not feel comfortable advocating for themselves.

== Students with Disabilities: ==
11% of students in higher education have a disability.

'''Section 504''' of the '''Rehabilitation Act of 1973''' and '''Title II''' of the '''Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990''', prohibit discrimination on the basis of disability. Practically every school district and higher education school in the United States is subject to one or both of these laws.

Higher education is required to provide appropriate academic adjustments as necessary to ensure that it does not discriminate on the basis of disability.

'''Can a college deny an admission because they have a disability?'''

No. If you meet the essential requirements for admission, a postsecondary school may not deny your admission simply because you have a disability.

'''Does an individual have to inform a postsecondary school that they have a disability?'''

No. But if you want the school to provide an academic adjustment, you must identify yourself as having a disability. Likewise, you should let the school know about your disability if you Academic adjustments may include auxiliary aids and services, as well as modifications to academic requirements as necessary to ensure equal educational opportunity. Examples of adjustments are: arranging for priority registration; reducing a course load; substituting one course for another; providing note takers, recording devices, sign language interpreters, extended time for testing, and equipping school computers with screen-reading, voice recognition, or other adaptive software or hardware.

'''What academic adjustments must a postsecondary school provide?'''

In providing an academic adjustment, your postsecondary school is not required to lower or substantially modify essential requirements. For example, although your school may be required to provide extended testing time, it is not required to change the substantive content of the test. In addition, your postsecondary school does not have to make adjustments that would fundamentally alter the nature of a service, program, or activity, or that would result in an undue financial or administrative burden.
want to ensure that you are assigned to accessible facilities. In any event, your disclosure of a disability is always voluntary.

'''Do I have to prove that I have a disability to obtain an academic adjustment?'''

Generally, yes. Your school will probably require you to provide documentation showing that you have a current disability and need an academic adjustment.

When students enter the university setting, they are responsible for requesting accommodations through the appropriate office. This may be the first time the students will have had to advocate for themselves in this way. For first year students, this is probably a very different process than what they experienced in high school with an '''Individualized Education Program (IEP)''' or '''Section 504''' plan. IEP is a document that is developed for each public-school child who needs special education. The IEP is created through a team effort, reviewed periodically.

==== '''What does this mean for our work?''' ====
Approach teaching students with disabilities just as you would with teaching other students: expect diversity, anticipate a range of abilities, and look for the particular strengths and learning profiles of each student.

==== '''How does working with technology and media equipment provide unique advantages and disadvantages when intersecting with students with disabilities?''' ====
Instructional material may be difficult for students with certain disabilities. For instance, when showing a video in class you need to consider your audience. Students with visual disabilities may have difficulty seeing non-verbalized actions; while those with disorders like photosensitive epilepsy may experience seizures with flashing lights or images; and those students with hearing loss may not be able to hear the accompanying audio. Using closed-captioning, providing electronic transcripts, describing on-screen action, allowing students to check the video out on their own, and outlining the role the video plays in the day’s lesson helps reduce the access barrier for students with disabilities and allows them the ability to be an active member of the class.

Faculty should inform staff prior to the workshop if their program has a student with a disability.

==== Accessibility on Macs: ====
Options that can be useful on a Mac to consider are the '''VoiceOver Utility'''. VoiceOver gives auditory descriptions of each onscreen element and provides helpful hints along the way — using gestures, a keyboard, or a braille display. And it supports more than 30 languages, including multiple voice options.

'''Audio Descriptions''' that someone watch movies with detailed audio descriptions of every scene. Movies with audio descriptions are displayed with the AD icon in the iTunes Store.

'''Dictation''' lets you talk where you would type — and it works in over 40 languages. So you can reply to an email, search the web, or write a report using just your voice. Navigate to any text field, activate Dictation, then say what you want to write. mac OS also comes with more than 50 editing and formatting commands. So you can turn on Dictation and tell your Mac to bold a paragraph, delete a sentence, or replace a word. You can also use Automator workflows to create your own Dictation commands.

'''Zoom''' is a powerful built-in magnifier that lets you enlarge your screen up to 20 times, so you can better see what’s on the display. Set up a shortcut for quickly zooming in and out by selecting “Use scroll gesture with modifier keys to zoom” in the Zoom pane of Accessibility in System Preferences. You can zoom using full screen or picture-in-picture, allowing you to see the zoomed area in a separate window while keeping the rest of the screen at its native size.

Watch movies, TV shows, videos, and podcasts using '''closed captioning''', a feature supported in macOS apps like iTunes and QuickTime. Just look for the small CC icon to buy or rent captioned movies from the iTunes Store or find captioned podcasts in iTunes U. You can even customize captions with different styles and fonts, including styles that are larger and outlined.

When you’re using headphones, you may miss some audio if you’re hard of hearing or deaf in one ear. That’s because stereo recordings usually have distinct left- and right-channel audio tracks. '''Mono Audio''' on macOS can help by playing both audio channels in both ears, and letting you adjust the balance for greater volume in either ear.

Now you can navigate macOS with minimal use of a physical keyboard. The '''Accessibility Keyboard''' is a customizable, onscreen keyboard that gives users with mobility impairments more advanced typing and navigation capabilities. It also supports head-tracking hardware to move the cursor and select or drag onscreen items. And the Accessibility Keyboard has full Dwell support, allowing all of macOS to be used without ever needing to click a mouse button.

==== Is your work accessible? ====
'''Podcast/videos''': Can someone who is deaf or blind receive the content in your podcasts or videos?

Are the videos captioned?

Is the voice over enough to convey the information with the images?

Language: Is the content easy to understand? How do you explain complex terms and
jargon? Is your content in a language that your audience will understand?

Do you use color—that a colorblind person would not see—to communicate important concepts or information?

Follow principles of '''Universal Design''': the design of buildings, products or environments to make them accessible to all people, regardless of age, disability or other factors.

==== Final Tips for Teaching Students or Each Other ====
* Try and figure out what knowledge/experience learners come into the session with
* Don’t assume anything about learners—baseline knowledge, background, pronouns, etc.
* If you don’t know the answer to a question, model how to find the answer—googling, Wiki guides, manuals, asking other staff
* Feel comfortable knowing that some learners will need more support and time than others.
* Let learners contribute to the session in meaningful ways.
[[Category:2019-2020]]

Interns- Media Pedagogy

2020-11-05T19:40:07Z

Williaas: /* Students with Disabilities: */

== Pedagogy ==
* '''Pedagogy''' is a method and practice of teaching.
* '''Media pedagogy''' includes necessary changes to traditional pedagogy.
* Media pedagogy has a lot in common with '''constructivist theory''' in education.
* '''Constructivism''' is based on research for cognitive psychology, and suggests that people learn by constructing their own knowledge through an active learning process rather than simply absorbing knowledge directly from some other source.
* It took deep reforms in education recognize that knowledge is ''constructed'' by the student not ''given'' or ''delivered'' by teachers.
* Because technology is always changing, media pedagogy presents knowledge as problematic rather than fixed.
* On the staff side, media pedagogy is less content driven and instead based more on problem-solving.
* This educational approach promotes higher order thinking skills and the development critical analysis, metacognition, and reflection, often through creation, editing, and “publishing.”
* In media instruction, the continually changing nature of medium pushes its instructors to not just be users of technology, but co-creators of media work.

===== With an emphasis on '''student-centered education''', it is critical to think about the student population. =====
At a fundamental level curriculum should be '''relevant''' and '''diverse''', which requires an awareness of student interests and needs.

'''What groups of students do you get to know and how?'''

Staff can be at a disadvantage for this. Faculty get so much more time with students. The Multimedia Lab provides a unique opportunity for this, but we need help from faculty to get to know their students prior to workshops.

==== Some major, but certainly not all, categories of student diversity that we will want to hold in our minds during all of our instruction are: ====

== Racial and Ethnic Identity: ==
* Students identify with many different cultures and ways of looking at the world.
* As an educator, is paramount to learn about student background and expectations.
* Recognition of racial and ethnic differences provide an understanding for more effective instruction.

== Cultural Pluralism ==
* Cultural Pluralism rejects both '''cultural assimilation''' (the process of incorporating an immigrant group into mainstream culture) and '''separatism''' (cultural groups should maintain their own identity without trying to fit into an overall American culture), instead each subculture maintains its own individuality while contributing to the whole. The goal is to create a sense of society’s fullness based on the unique strength of each of its parts--instead of a melting pot, a mosaic.
* Traditionally schools have been run for the benefit of those in the dominant culture, thereby excluding minority groups from receiving the full range of benefits.
* If a school was to support cultural pluralism, it would avoid dominance of a single culture. Faculty, staff, and administration would be diverse and would be minority role models for students to interact with.
* Curriculum would be filled with the histories and contributions of diverse groups.

=== Demographics at Evergreen: ===
For 2016:
* 29% enrollment for students of color
* 229 total faculty, 53 faculty of color
* 554 total staff, 124 staff of color

=== These numbers tell us the ideal of cultural pluralism is not in practice at our institution. So, what can we do? ===

== Multicultural Education ==
Multicultural Education is a response to economic inequality, racism, and sexism in American Culture.
It goals include: reducing prejudice, improving the academic achievement of minority students, building commitment to cultural pluralism, and incorporating minority groups’ perspectives into curriculum.
Multiculturalism comes out of the social justice movements 60s. It’s lead to things like single-group studies, like African American and women’s studies and curriculum that examines inequality and oppression and actions to remediate these inequalities.

=== What does this concept mean for our work? ===
Media is involved in the transmission of information, correct or incorrect, balanced or biased.
Representation in media--images, videos, sound. Who are the subjects you are showing, what artists are you mentioning? All curriculum is a choice.

Can we as a work group generate terminology that can replace problematic media terms that come out of the military, binary gendering, and racism?

With the acknowledgement that there is not equity between dominant and minority groups in education, should this change how you spend your time and attention with populations of students in workshops or on productions?

Promoting equity in the classroom does not necessarily mean treating all students equally. Though it does mean giving all students equal opportunities to succeed, it may also mean giving some students more encouragement in class or structuring your lessons in ways that promote greater participation from a wider number of students.

== Students with a primary language other than English: ==
4.6 million English language learners are enrolled in public schools, which is almost 10% of all students.

Some instructional Strategies for English language learner:

* Slow down your speech and use shorter sentences, present tense of words, synonyms, examples, gestures, and demonstrations.
* Avoid expressions or sayings that are only common in the United States.
* Use as many mediums as possible to convey information: oral, written, videos, teacher demonstration, student demonstration, etc.
* Give students enough time to process questions.
* Use metaphors and imagery for cues.

== Learning Styles ==
Some students enter college and thrive, others do not, for a whole host of reasons. Furthermore, students may not respond to your style teaching. One of the biggest challenges as a teacher is to provide a variety of learning experiences.

Psychologist Howard Gardner proposed that people have at least eight distinct intellectual capacities they use to approach problems and create products:
# Verbal-linguistic intelligence draws on the individual’s language skills, oral and written, to express what’s on the person’s mind and to understand other people.
# Logical-mathematical intelligence is a person’s ability to understand principles of some kind of causal system, like a scientist does, or to manipulate numbers, quantities, and operations, like a mathematician does.
# Spatial intelligence refers to the ability to represent the spatial world internally in the mind, like a chess player or sculptor.
# Bodily-kinesthetic intelligence is the capacity to use your whole body or parts of your body to solve a problem, make something, or put on some kind of production, like an athlete or performing artist.
# Musical intelligence is the capacity to “think” in music and to be able to hear patterns and recognize, remember, and manipulate them.
# Interpersonal intelligence is the ability to understand other people.
# Intrapersonal intelligence refers to having an understanding of yourself and knowing your preferences, capabilities, and deficiencies.
# Naturalist intelligence refers to the ability to discriminate among living things (plants and animals) and to have sensitivity towards features of the natural world.

Schools often emphasize curriculum that predominately targets '''linguistic''' and '''logical-mathematical''' tasks. Students who are strong in linguistic and logical-mathematical work are likely to succeed and feel achievement. This leaves many other students with strengths in these other areas to experience frustration or failure in the school environment.

==== What can we do? ====
Rather than labeling students as having a particular learning style, instruction should offer varied lessons that appeal to a range of strengths, abilities, and learning preferences over time.

Giving students choice can help. In an equipment proficiency, some students take diligent notes, so students draw visual representations of the lesson, other students focus on listening. There is also a large emphasis on the hands-on element to our work.

Teach instructional materials in multiple modes helps. Wiki articles, videos, spoken, demonstration, etc.

== Gender Identity & Sexual Identity: ==
* Men and women identifying individuals are raised differently even within the same families, and society has different expectations of them.
* Non-binary, Transgender, agender, and intersex students face even further assumptions, stereotypes, discriminations, and prejudices.
* Treating gender and sexual identity equitably is often a struggle for teachers.
* It is a critical to establish and maintain a safe and supportive environment LGBTQIA+ students.
* Educators must validate and affirm multiple expressions of sexuality and gender.

==== What are some things that can be done as an instructor to validate and affirm these multiple expressions in Media workshops? ====
Cover pronouns, and if you don’t know what pronoun someone uses, don’t assume.

The artists or subjects selected as examples from can represent the LGBTQIA+ community.

It’s important to be concise in both language and purpose when discussing student-advocacy. Being an advocate means more than just preventing discrimination. Never tolerate derogatory or belittling language in the classroom. Recognize the struggles of students, listen and display empathy, and provide a safe space for self-expression. Constantly examine the school’s climate to determine how the faculty and staff can improve inclusiveness for ALL students.

==== What are some specific hurtles in media with gender? ====
According to San Diego State's Center for the Study of Women in Television and Film, women made up just 7 percent of all directors on the top 250 films, a 2 percent decline from 2015.

Much of equipment is gendered, but terminology will only change if folks put in the effort to make the transformation. There are other industry standards that can replace gendered naming.

== Socioeconomic Background: ==
'''Socioeconomic Status (SES)''' encompasses not just income but also educational attainment, financial security, and subjective perceptions of social status and social class. Socioeconomic status can contain quality of life attributes as well as the opportunities and privileges afforded to people within society. Poverty, specifically, is not a single factor but rather is characterized by multiple physical and psychosocial stressors. The school systems in low-SES communities are often under-resourced, negatively affecting students’ academic progress and outcomes.

The success rate of low-income students in science, technology, engineering, and mathematics disciplines is much lower than that of students who do not come from underrepresented backgrounds.

According to the U.S. Census Bureau (2014), individuals within the top family income percentiles are 8 times more likely to obtain a bachelor’s degree by age 24 as compared to individuals from the lowest family income percentiles.

==== What does this mean for us? ====
Clearly, we’re not going to ask students what socioeconomic bracket they fall into, but we can’t except students to come into school with the same levels of exposure to technology. Media technology is expensive. We can't just assume a baseline of media knowledge and it is critical to offer supplemental support to students that may not feel comfortable advocating for themselves.

== Students with Disabilities: ==
11% of students in higher education have a disability.

'''Section 504''' of the '''Rehabilitation Act of 1973''' and '''Title II''' of the '''Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990''', prohibit discrimination on the basis of disability. Practically every school district and higher education school in the United States is subject to one or both of these laws.

Higher education is required to provide appropriate academic adjustments as necessary to ensure that it does not discriminate on the basis of disability.

'''Can a college deny an admission because they have a disability?'''

No. If you meet the essential requirements for admission, a postsecondary school may not deny your admission simply because you have a disability.

'''Does an individual have to inform a postsecondary school that they have a disability?'''

No. But if you want the school to provide an academic adjustment, you must identify yourself as having a disability. Likewise, you should let the school know about your disability if you Academic adjustments may include auxiliary aids and services, as well as modifications to academic requirements as necessary to ensure equal educational opportunity. Examples of adjustments are: arranging for priority registration; reducing a course load; substituting one course for another; providing note takers, recording devices, sign language interpreters, extended time for testing, and equipping school computers with screen-reading, voice recognition, or other adaptive software or hardware.

'''What academic adjustments must a postsecondary school provide?'''

In providing an academic adjustment, your postsecondary school is not required to lower or substantially modify essential requirements. For example, although your school may be required to provide extended testing time, it is not required to change the substantive content of the test. In addition, your postsecondary school does not have to make adjustments that would fundamentally alter the nature of a service, program, or activity, or that would result in an undue financial or administrative burden.
want to ensure that you are assigned to accessible facilities. In any event, your disclosure of a disability is always voluntary.

'''Do I have to prove that I have a disability to obtain an academic adjustment?'''

Generally, yes. Your school will probably require you to provide documentation showing that you have a current disability and need an academic adjustment.

When students enter the university setting, they are responsible for requesting accommodations through the appropriate office. This may be the first time the students will have had to advocate for themselves in this way. For first year students, this is probably a very different process than what they experienced in high school with an '''Individualized Education Program (IEP)''' or '''Section 504''' plan. IEP is a document that is developed for each public-school child who needs special education. The IEP is created through a team effort, reviewed periodically.

==== '''What does this mean for our work?''' ====
Approach teaching students with disabilities just as you would with teaching other students: expect diversity, anticipate a range of abilities, and look for the particular strengths and learning profiles of each student.

==== '''How does working with technology and media equipment provide unique advantages and disadvantages when intersecting with students with disabilities?''' ====
Instructional material may be difficult for students with certain disabilities. For instance, when showing a video in class you need to consider your audience. Students with visual disabilities may have difficulty seeing non-verbalized actions; while those with disorders like photosensitive epilepsy may experience seizures with flashing lights or images; and those students with hearing loss may not be able to hear the accompanying audio. Using closed-captioning, providing electronic transcripts, describing on-screen action, allowing students to check the video out on their own, and outlining the role the video plays in the day’s lesson helps reduce the access barrier for students with disabilities and allows them the ability to be an active member of the class.

Faculty should inform staff prior to the workshop if their program has a student with a disability.

==== Accessibility on Macs: ====
Options that can be useful on a Mac to consider are the '''VoiceOver Utility'''. VoiceOver gives auditory descriptions of each onscreen element and provides helpful hints along the way — using gestures, a keyboard, or a braille display. And it supports more than 30 languages, including multiple voice options.

'''Audio Descriptions''' that someone watch movies with detailed audio descriptions of every scene. Movies with audio descriptions are displayed with the AD icon in the iTunes Store.

'''Dictation''' lets you talk where you would type — and it works in over 40 languages. So you can reply to an email, search the web, or write a report using just your voice. Navigate to any text field, activate Dictation, then say what you want to write. mac OS also comes with more than 50 editing and formatting commands. So you can turn on Dictation and tell your Mac to bold a paragraph, delete a sentence, or replace a word. You can also use Automator workflows to create your own Dictation commands.

'''Zoom''' is a powerful built-in magnifier that lets you enlarge your screen up to 20 times, so you can better see what’s on the display. Set up a shortcut for quickly zooming in and out by selecting “Use scroll gesture with modifier keys to zoom” in the Zoom pane of Accessibility in System Preferences. You can zoom using full screen or picture-in-picture, allowing you to see the zoomed area in a separate window while keeping the rest of the screen at its native size.

Watch movies, TV shows, videos, and podcasts using '''closed captioning''', a feature supported in macOS apps like iTunes and QuickTime. Just look for the small CC icon to buy or rent captioned movies from the iTunes Store or find captioned podcasts in iTunes U. You can even customize captions with different styles and fonts, including styles that are larger and outlined.

When you’re using headphones, you may miss some audio if you’re hard of hearing or deaf in one ear. That’s because stereo recordings usually have distinct left- and right-channel audio tracks. '''Mono Audio''' on macOS can help by playing both audio channels in both ears, and letting you adjust the balance for greater volume in either ear.

Now you can navigate macOS with minimal use of a physical keyboard. The '''Accessibility Keyboard''' is a customizable, onscreen keyboard that gives users with mobility impairments more advanced typing and navigation capabilities. It also supports head-tracking hardware to move the cursor and select or drag onscreen items. And the Accessibility Keyboard has full Dwell support, allowing all of macOS to be used without ever needing to click a mouse button.

==== Is your work accessible? ====
'''Podcast/videos''': Can someone who is deaf or blind receive the content in your podcasts or videos?

Are the videos captioned?

Is the voice over enough to convey the information with the images?

Language: Is the content easy to understand? How do you explain complex terms and
jargon? Is your content in a language that your audience will understand?

Do you use color—that a colorblind person would not see—to communicate important concepts or information?

Follow principles of '''Universal Design''': the design of buildings, products or environments to make them accessible to all people, regardless of age, disability or other factors.

==== Final Tips for Teaching Students or Each Other ====
•Try and figure out what knowledge/experience learners come into the session with

•Don’t assume anything about learners—baseline knowledge, background, pronouns, etc.

•If you don’t know the answer to a question, model how to find the answer—googling, Wiki guides, manuals, asking other staff

•Feel comfortable knowing that some learners will need more support and time than others.

•Let learners contribute to the session in meaningful ways.
[[Category:2019-2020]]

APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide

2020-03-05T17:11:22Z

Williaas:

[[File:SONY HXR N5.jpg| SONY HXR N5U CAMCORDER]]

[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/docs/aps-docs/FINAL_HXR-NX5U_Ops_Manual.pdf Sony HXR Complete Manual - PDF] 
[http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/2014/03/27/sony-hxr-nx5u-nxcam/ Video Tutorials] 
==INTRODUCTION==
The Sony HXR-NX5U is a prosumer HD camcorder that records to memory cards utilizing the AVCHD format. This camcorder provides high quality, long duration recording with dual memory card slots, state-of-the-art G lens and 3 CMOS sensors. As with all Media Loan Equipment, '''''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE''''' for the HXR and all accessories when you check this camera out from APS.
==PRECAUTIONS==
*'''DO NOT HOLD THE CAMCORDER BY THE:'''
:::LENS HOOD
:::LCD PANEL
:::INTERNAL MICROPHONE
:::MICROPHONE OR MICROPHONE HOLDER
:::VIEWFINDER
*'''PROTECT THE HXR FROM WATER AND SOURCES OF MOISTURE OR SALT WATER/SPRAY. THE CAMERA IS NOT WATER RESISTANT'''
 
*'''DO NOT EXPOSE THE BATTERY PACK TO WATER. THE BATTERY PACK IS NOT WATER RESISTANT'''
 
*'''DO NOT SHAKE, KNOCK, DROP OR SUBJECT THE HXR TO EXCESSIVE SHOCK. '''
 
*'''CONNECT CABLES TO THE CAMCORDER WITH THEIR TERMINALS PLACED THE CORRECT WAY. SQUEEZING THE TERMINALS INTO THE HXR JACKS MAY DAMAGE THEM OR RESULT IN A MALFUNCTION OF THE CAMCORDER'''
 
*'''DO NOT EXPOSE THE CAMCORDER'S VIEWFINDER, LENS, LCD SCREEN TO THE SUN OR STRONG LIGHT SOURCE FOR EXTENDED PERIODS. INTENSE LIGHT SOURCES, ESPECIALLY THE SUN, WILL CONVERGE ON THE VIEWFINDER OR LENS AND DAMAGE THE INTERNAL PARTS OF THE CAMCORDER.'''
 
*'''ALWAYS CLOSE THE LENS COVER AND STORE IN CASE WHEN NOT IN USE'''
 
*'''DO NOT APPLY ANY LIQUID (CLEANING OR OTHERWISE) DIRECTLY TO THE LCD SCREEN'''
 
*'''IF THE CAMCORDER IS BROUGHT FROM A COLD PLACE TO A WARM PLACE, MOISTURE MAY CONDENSE INSIDE THE CAMCORDER AND CAUSE A MALFUNCTION. WHEN YOU BRING THE HXR FROM A COLD PLACE TO A WARM PLACE, PUT CAMCORDER IN A PLASTIC BAG AND SEAL IT TIGHTLY. REMOVE THE BAG WHEN THE AIR TEMPERATURE INSIDE THE PLASTIC BAG HAS REACHED AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (AFTER 1 HOUR)'''

==SUPPLYING POWER TO THE HXR==
===CHARGING THE BATTERY PACK===
APS provides two Lithium battery packs when you check out the HXR. Use the supplied AC Adapter/Charger to charge these batteries before use.
# Set the mode switch to charge
# Connect the power cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
# Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.
# Place the battery pack in the slot of the AC Adapter/Charger, press down, and slide battery until the charge lamp turns on and charging starts.
When the battery pack reaches a normal charge, the charge lamp turns off. You can continue to charge the battery pack for an additional hour for a full charge, which lets you use the battery a little longer. Remove the battery pack from the AC Adapter/Charger when the charge is completed.
===ATTACHING/REMOVING THE BATTERY PACK===
To attach the battery pack, press the battery against the back of the camcorder and slide it down.
 
To remove the battery pack, slide the '''POWER''' switch to '''OFF'''. Push the '''BAT RELEASE''' button and remove the battery pack.
===AC ADAPTER/CHARGER===
#Connect the power cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
#Connect the power cord to the wall outlet
#Connect the connecting cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
#Set mode switch of the AC Adapter/Charger to '''VCR/CAMERA'''
#Press the connecting part of the connecting cord against the back of the HXR in the Battery slot and slide it down
* Use a nearby wall outlet when using the AC Adapter/Charger. '''Disconnect the AC Adapter/Charger from the wall outlet immediately if any malfunction occurs while using the camcorder.'''
* '''DO NOT''' use the AC Adapter/Charger placed in a narrow space, such as between a wall and furniture.
* '''DO NOT''' short-circuit the DC plug of the AC Adapter/Charger or battery terminal with any metallic objects. This may cause a malfunction.
* '''UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTER''' from the camcorder and wall socket when camcorder is not in use. Even if your camcorder is turned off, AC power is still supplied to it while connected to the wall outlet via the AC Adapter/Charger.
==OPERATING THE MENU==
# Set the '''POWER''' switch to ON
# Press the '''MENU''' button
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the icon of the desired menu is highlighted, then press the dial to select the menu.
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the desired menu item is highlighted, then press the dial to select the item.
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the desired setting is highlighted, the press the dial to select.
# Press the '''MENU''' button to hide the menu screen. To return to the previous screen, select '''RETURN'''.
*'''TIP''': You may select menu items with the </> buttons.
**'''NOTE''': The available menu items vary depending on the context of your camcorder during recording or playback.
==MEMORY CARDS==
APS supplies two, 32GB memory cards (installed) when you check out the HXR camcorder. This should provide you with ample recording time, even at the highest quality settings. Should you require additional memory cards for your production, you can use "Memory Stick PRO Duo" media, "Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo" media, SD memory cards and, SDHC memory cards.
* '''Remember to re-install the memory cards supplied by APS before returning the camera should you choose to use your own media to avoid charges.'''
Before recording, format the memory card(s).
# With the camcorder powered on, press the '''MODE''' button.
# Touch '''MANAGE MEDIA''' setting '''MEDIA FORMAT'''
# Select the recording media to be formatted
# Select YES. The HXR will ask you to verify your selection.
*'''TIP''': The easiest way to retrieve your files is to make a disk image of the memory card. You can check out a card reader from Media Loan and use the MML or Non-Linear Editing Suites to make your disk image(s). You can then use Final Cut Pro/Adobe Premiere to log and transfer your video for editing.
** '''NOTE''': While [Executing...] is displayed, do not operate the buttons on the camcorder, disconnect the AC Adapter/Charger, or removing recording media from the camcorder. (The access lamp is light or flashing while formatting recording media.)
===NOTES ON RECORDING===
'''Estimated Recording Time on one 32 GB card in minutes with HD Audio Format set to Linear PCM/Dolby Digital:'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! AVCHD 24M (FX) !! AVCHD 17M (FH) !! AVCHD 9M (HQ) !! AVCHD 5M (LP)
|-
| 170/180 || 225/235 || 385/435 || 605/750
|}
* When the access lamp is lit or flashing red, the camcorder is writing data on the recording media. Do not remove the battery pack or the AC Adapter/Charger.
* If a movie file exceeds 2GB during recording, the camcorder divides the file and create a new file automatically.
* The menu settings are stored in your camcorder when you turn the '''POWER''' switch to OFF. Do not remove battery pack or AC Adapter/Charger.
==RECORDING==
# Open the shutter of the lens hood.
# Slide the '''POWER''' switch to ON while pressing the green button.
The recording lamp lights up during recording.
To STOP recording, press the record button or the handle record button again.
*'''TIP''': When recording in high definition image quality (HD), the aspect ratio is fixed to 16:9. When recording in standard definition image quality (SD), you can switch the aspect ratio to 4:3.
*'''TIP''': For low angle recording, the handle record button is convenient. Release the '''HOLD''' lever to enable the handle record button. It might be helpful if you set the LCD panel face up or close it after turning it face down, or life the viewfinder up during the low angle recording.
** '''NOTE''': the camcorder will switch from Memory Card A to Memory Card B just before space runs out on Card A (and vice versa). '''Do not eject memory card that is currently being used for recording. Replace only the memory card whose slot lamp is off.'''
===SELECTING RECORDING QUALITY===
You can set the recording image quality to high definition image quality (HD) or standard definition image quality (SD).
To change the setting:
# Press '''MENU'''
# Select REC/OUT settings
# Select REC SET
# Select HD/SD SET
===SELECTING THE RECORDING FORMAT===
You can select the recording format (bit-rate, image size, frame rate, scanning system). The default setting is HD 1080/60i FX/SD 480/60i HQ.
To change the setting value:
# Press '''MENU'''
# Select REC/OUT settings
# Select REC SET
# Select REC FORMAT
If you select HD 1080/60i FX (the default), movies are recorded with the following format:
* HD - High Definition image quality
* 1080 - Effective scanning lines
* 60 - Frame Rate
* i - Scanning system
* FX - Recording mode
====SETTING DESCRIPTION====
Bit Rate:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! FX !! FH !! HQ !! LP
|-
| Max 24 Mbps || Approx 17 Mbps || Approx 9 Mbps || Approx 5 Mbps
|}
Image Size:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! FX !! FH !! HQ !! SP
|-
| 1920x1080/1280x720 || 1920x1080/1280x720 || HD recording 1440x1080 SD recording 720x480 || 1440x1080
|}
Frame rate: 24,30 or 60
Scanning system:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! i !! p !! pSCAN
|-
| Interlaced || Progressive || Recording images of progressive scanning as interlace signal (60i)
|}
*'''NOTE''': The recording mode is fixed to FX or FH with the progressive scanning system.
*'''NOTE''': When the recording format is changed to or from 720/60p, you will be prompted to reboot the camcorder. Select YES. Otherwise, you cannot switch the recording format.
==ADJUSTING THE ZOOM==
===USING THE POWER ZOOM===
The power zoom lever is pressure sensitive. For a slower zoom use less pressure and for a faster zoom use more pressure.
*'''NOTE''': Be sure to keep your finger on the power zoom lever. If you move your finger off the power zoom lever, the operation sound of the power zoom lever mat also be recorded.
===USING THE HANDLE ZOOM===
* Set the handle zoom switch to VAR or FIX
* Press the handle zoom lever to zoom in or out
When you set the handle zoom switch to VAR, you can zoom in or out at variable speed.
When you set the handle zoom switch to FIX, you can zoom in or out at fixed speed set in HANDLE ZOOM.
You cannot use the handle zoom lever when the handle zoom switch is set to OFF.
===USING THE ZOOM RING===
You can zoom at the desired speed by turning the zoom ring. Fine adjustment is also possible.
Turn the zoom ring at moderate speed. If you turn it too fast, the zoom speed may lag behind the zoom ring rotation speed, or the operation sound of the zoom may also be recorded.
====ADJUSTING THE FOCUS MANUALLY====
# Set the FOCUS switch to MAN
# Rotate the focus ring and adjust the focus.
*'''TIP''': It is easier to focus on the subject when you use the zoom function. Move the power zoom lever towards T (telephoto) to adjust the focus, and then towards W (wide angle) to adjust the zoom/compose your shot recording.
====PUSH AUTO FOCUS====
Record the subject while pressing and holding the PUSH AUTO button. If you release the button, the setting returns to manual focusing. Use this function to shift the focus on one subject to another (Rack Focus). The scenes will shift smoothly.
==ADJUSTING THE IMAGE BRIGHTNESS==
You can adjust the image brightness by adjusting the iris, gain, shutter speed or by reducing the light volume with the ND Filter.
*'''NOTE''': You cannot use the back light function and the spotlight when iris, gain and shutter speed are adjusted manually.
*'''NOTE''': AE SHIFT is not effective temporarily while you adjust the iris, gain, and shutter speed manually.
===ADJUSTING THE IRIS===
You can manually adjust the iris to control the volume of the light entering the lens. By adjusting the iris, you can change or close the aperture of the lens, which is expressed as an F value between F1.6 and F11. The volume of the light increases the more you open the aperture (decreasing F value). The volume of light decreases the more that you close the aperture (increasing F value). The current F value appears on the screen.
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''IRIS''' button if "A" is displayed next to current iris value.
# Adjust the iris with the iris ring.
*'''TIP''': The F value becomes close to F3.4 as the zoom position changes from W to T even when you open the aperture by setting the F value low then F3.4, such as F1.6.
*'''TIP''': The range of focus, an important effect of the aperture, is called depth of field. The depth of field gets shallower as the aperture is opened and deeper as the aperture is closed.
===ADJUSTING THE GAIN===
You can adjust the gain manually when you do not want to use the AGC (Automatic Gain Control).
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL'''switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''GAIN''' button if "A" is displayed next to current gain value.
# Set the gain switch to H,M or L. The gain value set for the selected fain switch position appears on the screen. You can set the gain value for each gain switch from [GAIN SET] of the (CAMERA SET) menu.
===GAIN SET===
you can set gain values for H, M, and L positions of the '''GAIN''' switch. The default settings of [H], [M] and [L] are 18 dB, 9 dB, and 0 dB respectively.
# Press the '''MENU''' button, select CAMERA SET then GAIN SET.
# Select [H], [M] or [L] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Set the gain value with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial, then press the dial. You can select the value between -6 dB and -21 dB by 3 dB. The larger the value, the higher the gain.
# Select [OK] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Press the '''MENU''' button to hide the menu screen.
====SMOOTH GAIN====
You can set the transition speed at which the gain setting shifts from one value to another, set for the '''GAIN''' switch positions, when you switch the '''GAIN''' switch from a position to another. You can select the transition speed from [FAST], [MIDDLE] and [SLOW] or set to [OFF]. The default setting is [OFF].
===ADJUSTING THE SHUTTER SPEED===
You can manually adjust and fix the shutter speed. You can make a moving object look still or emphasize the movement of a moving subject by adjusting the shutter speed.
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch
# Press the '''SHUTTER SPEED''' button until the shutter speed value is highlighted.
# Change the shutter speed displayed on the screen by turning the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial. You can adjust the shutter speed in a range 1/4 second through 1/10000 second. The denominator of the set shutter speed appears on the screen when you set the shutter speed to 1/100 second. The larger the value on the screen, the faster the shutter speed.
# Press the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to lock the shutter speed. To readjust the shutter speed, do steps 2 to 4 again.
===ADJUSTING THE ND FILTER===
You can record the subject clearly by using the ND filter when the recording environment is too bright. The ND filters 1, 2, and 3 reduce the volume of light to about 1/4, 1/16 and 1/64 respectively.
If ND1 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 1. If ND2 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 2. If ND3 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 3. The ND filter indicator will stop flashing and remain on the screen.
If NDOFF flashes set the ND filter to off. The ND filter icon will disappear from the screen.
*'''NOTE''': If you change the ND filter to OFF, the ND filter icon will disappear from the screen.
*'''NOTE''': When adjusting the iris manually, the ND filter icon does not flash even if the light volume should be adjusted with the ND filter.
*'''NOTE''': If the camcorder cannot detect the ND filter position (OFF/1/2/3), ND flashes on the screen. Make sure that the ND filter is set correctly.
**'''TIP''': While recording a bright subject, diffraction may occur if you close the aperture further down, resulting in a fuzzy focus (this is a common phenomenon with video cameras). The ND filter suppresses this phenomenon and gives better recording results.
===WHITE BALANCE===
You can adjust and fix white balance according to the lighting conditions of recording environment. You can store white balance values in memory A and memory B. Unless a white balance is readjusted, values will remain even after the power has been turned off.
====SETTING WHITE BALANCE====
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''WHT BAL''' button.
# Set the white balance memory switch to '''A''' or '''B'''.
# Capture a white subject, such as white paper, full-screen in the same lighting condition as the subject.
# Press the '''Custom WHT BAL''' button (one push) WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B starts flashing rapidly. It will stay on when the white balance adjustment is completed and the adjusted value is stored in WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B.
*'''NOTE''': When a white balance adjustment value has not been obtained successfully, WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B turns from rapid flashing to slow flashing. Adjust the subject appropriately and set the shutter speed to auto or around 1/60, the try adjusting white balance again.
====ZEBRA STRIPING====
You can display a zebra pattern as a guide for adjusting brightness. Zebra stripes are the only real indication of lighting levels. The Zebra pattern is a stripe pattern displayed where the image will be overexposed over a certain level and detail will be lost.
You can select the brightness level between 70 and 100 or 100+. The default setting is [70]. 100 IRE is the upper limit of legal video and is the correct value of white. From The Filmmaker's Handbook: "It's an old cliché of "video lighting" that it's necessary to expose flesh tones consistently from shot to shot, for example at 65-70 percent on a waveform monitor. This approach is outmoded (if not racist). First, skin tone varies a lot from person to person, from pale white to dark black. If you use auto-iris on close-ups of people's faces, it will tend to expose everyone the same...Momentary use of auto-iris is always good way to spot-check what the camera thinks the best average exposure should be, but don't neglect to use your eyes and your creative common sense" (pg. 191).
# Press the '''MENU''' button.
# Select DISPLAY SET with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select ZEBRA with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select the appropriate level.
*'''NOTE''': When you select [ON], the Zebra icon (a square with diagonal lines) and the brightness level appear on the screen. The zebra pattern will not be recorded with the image. the default setting is [OFF].
==AUDIO SETUP==
===CHANNEL SETTING===
# Select input with the '''CH1''' (INT MIC/INPUT 1) switch and the '''CH2''' (INT MIC/INPUT1/INPUT2).
# Set '''INPUT1''' to an appropriate position for the microphone connected to the INPUT1 jack.
* LINE: For inputting sound from an audio device.
* MIC: For inputting sound from an external microphone that does not support the +48V power source (phantom power).
* MIC+48V: For inputting sound from a device that supports the +48v power source, including the supplied microphone.
When you connect a microphone to the INPUT2 jack, set the INPUT2 switch to an appropriate position for that microphone.
'''WHEN THE CH1 SWITCH IS SET TO INT MIC'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! CH2 SWITCH POSITION !! INPUT CHANNEL !! SOURCE
|-
| INT MIC || Internal microphone (L) || CH1
|-
| INT MIC || Internal microphone (R) || CH2*)
|-
| INPUT1 || Internal microphone (mono) || CH1
|-
| INPUT1 || XLR INPUT1 || CH2**
|-
| INPUT2 || Internal microphone (mono) || CH1
|-
| INPUT2 || Internal microphone (mono) || CH2
|}
'''WHEN THE CH1 SWITCH IS SET TO INPUT1'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! CH2 SWITCH !! INPUT CHANNEL !! SOURCE
|-
| INT MIC || XLR INPUT1 || CH1
|-
| INT MIC || Internal microphone (mono) || CH2**
|-
| INPUT1 || XLR INPUT1 || CH1
|-
| INPUT1 || XLR INPUT1 || CH2**
|-
| INPUT2 || XLR INPUT1 || CH1
|-
| INPUT2 || XLR INPUT2 || CH2**
|}

* The recording level of channel 2 is synchronized with that of channel 1 when only the internal microphone is used. The recording level of channel 2 is controlled with '''CH1''' (AUDIO LEVEL) dial and the '''CH1''' (AUTO/MAN) switch.
* You can adjust the recording levels of channel 1 and channel 2 separately.
*'''NOTE''': Do not operate the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' switches during recording to prevent noise from being recorded.
*'''NOTE''': When you connect a device that supports the +48V power source to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, set the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' switches to MIC+48v prior to connecting the device. When you disconnect the device, set the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' switch to MIC first, then disconnect it.
*'''NOTE''': When you connect a microphone that does not support the +48V power source to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, set the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' to MIC. If you use it with the INPUT1/INPUT2 switch set to MIC+48V, it may damage or the recorded sound be distorted.

===ADJUSTING THE VOLUME===
You can adjust the volume of an internal microphone or a microphone connected to the INPUT1/INPUT2 jack.
# Set '''AUTO/MAN''' (CH1/CH2) switch of the channel to be adjust to MAN.
# Turn the '''AUDIO LEVEL''' dial to adjust the volume during recording or standby.
===SETTING THE HEADPHONE SOUND===
You can select the channel, CH1 or Ch2, to output from the headphone. You can select the channel, Ch1 or CH2 or Stereo Mix, to output from the headphone.
==TIME CODE and USER BIT==
The camcorder records movies accompanied by time data, such as time code and user bit. Display the setting screen by pressing the '''MENU''' and select (TC/UB SET) with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
You can synchronize the time code of this camcorder with the time code of another camcorder.
===PRESETTING THE TIME CODE===
# Select [TC PRESET] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select [PRESET] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select the first 2 digits with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial. You can set the time code between 00:00:00:00 and 23:59:59:29.
# Set other digits by repeating step 3.
# Select [OK] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
===TO RESET THE TIME CODE===
You can reset the time code (00:00:00:00). Select [RESET] in step 2 of "PRESETTING THE TIME CODE."
===PRESETTING THE USER BIT===
# Select [UB PRESET] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select [PRESET] with the '''SE:/PRESET EXEC''' dial.
# Select the first 2 digits with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Set other digits by repeating step 3.
# Select [OK] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
===TO RESET THE USER BIT===
You can reset the user bit (00 00 00 00) Select [RESET in step 2 of "PRESETTING THE USER BIT."
==PLAYBACK==
Press the '''VISUAL INDEX''' button or the '''MODE''' button followed by touching '''PLAY''' then [VISUAL INDEX] on the screen. To play back movies, touch recording media you want to play back. Touch the playback mode and select the desired image quality of movies. Touch the thumbnail of the movie you want to play twice.
[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide

2020-03-05T17:05:27Z

Williaas:

[[File:SONY HXR N5.jpg| SONY HXR N5U CAMCORDER]]

[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/docs/aps-docs/FINAL_HXR-NX5U_Ops_Manual.pdf Sony HXR Complete Manual - PDF] 
[http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/2014/03/27/sony-hxr-nx5u-nxcam/ Video Tutorials] 
==INTRODUCTION==
The Sony HXR-NX5U is a prosumer HD camcorder that records to memory cards utilizing the AVCHD format. This camcorder provides high quality, long duration recording with dual memory card slots, state-of-the-art G lens and 3 CMOS sensors. As with all Media Loan Equipment, '''''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE''''' for the HXR and all accessories when you check this camera out from APS.
==PRECAUTIONS==
*'''DO NOT HOLD THE CAMCORDER BY THE:'''
:::LENS HOOD
:::LCD PANEL
:::INTERNAL MICROPHONE
:::MICROPHONE OR MICROPHONE HOLDER
:::VIEWFINDER
*'''PROTECT THE HXR FROM WATER AND SOURCES OF MOISTURE OR SALT WATER/SPRAY. THE CAMERA IS NOT WATER RESISTANT'''
 
*'''DO NOT EXPOSE THE BATTERY PACK TO WATER. THE BATTERY PACK IS NOT WATER RESISTANT'''
 
*'''DO NOT SHAKE, KNOCK, DROP OR SUBJECT THE HXR TO EXCESSIVE SHOCK. '''
 
*'''CONNECT CABLES TO THE CAMCORDER WITH THEIR TERMINALS PLACED THE CORRECT WAY. SQUEEZING THE TERMINALS INTO THE HXR JACKS MAY DAMAGE THEM OR RESULT IN A MALFUNCTION OF THE CAMCORDER'''
 
*'''DO NOT EXPOSE THE CAMCORDER'S VIEWFINDER, LENS, LCD SCREEN TO THE SUN OR STRONG LIGHT SOURCE FOR EXTENDED PERIODS. INTENSE LIGHT SOURCES, ESPECIALLY THE SUN, WILL CONVERGE ON THE VIEWFINDER OR LENS AND DAMAGE THE INTERNAL PARTS OF THE CAMCORDER.'''
 
*'''ALWAYS CLOSE THE LENS COVER AND STORE IN CASE WHEN NOT IN USE'''
 
*'''DO NOT APPLY ANY LIQUID (CLEANING OR OTHERWISE) DIRECTLY TO THE LCD SCREEN'''
 
*'''IF THE CAMCORDER IS BROUGHT FROM A COLD PLACE TO A WARM PLACE, MOISTURE MAY CONDENSE INSIDE THE CAMCORDER AND CAUSE A MALFUNCTION. WHEN YOU BRING THE HXR FROM A COLD PLACE TO A WARM PLACE, PUT CAMCORDER IN A PLASTIC BAG AND SEAL IT TIGHTLY. REMOVE THE BAG WHEN THE AIR TEMPERATURE INSIDE THE PLASTIC BAG HAS REACHED AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (AFTER 1 HOUR)'''

==SUPPLYING POWER TO THE HXR==
===CHARGING THE BATTERY PACK===
APS provides two Lithium battery packs when you check out the HXR. Use the supplied AC Adapter/Charger to charge these batteries before use.
# Set the mode switch to charge
# Connect the power cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
# Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.
# Place the battery pack in the slot of the AC Adapter/Charger, press down, and slide battery until the charge lamp turns on and charging starts.
When the battery pack reaches a normal charge, the charge lamp turns off. You can continue to charge the battery pack for an additional hour for a full charge, which lets you use the battery a little longer. Remove the battery pack from the AC Adapter/Charger when the charge is completed.
===ATTACHING/REMOVING THE BATTERY PACK===
To attach the battery pack, press the battery against the back of the camcorder and slide it down.
 
To remove the battery pack, slide the '''POWER''' switch to '''OFF'''. Push the '''BAT RELEASE''' button and remove the battery pack.
===AC ADAPTER/CHARGER===
#Connect the power cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
#Connect the power cord to the wall outlet
#Connect the connecting cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
#Set mode switch of the AC Adapter/Charger to '''VCR/CAMERA'''
#Press the connecting part of the connecting cord against the back of the HXR in the Battery slot and slide it down
* Use a nearby wall outlet when using the AC Adapter/Charger. '''Disconnect the AC Adapter/Charger from the wall outlet immediately if any malfunction occurs while using the camcorder.'''
* '''DO NOT''' use the AC Adapter/Charger placed in a narrow space, such as between a wall and furniture.
* '''DO NOT''' short-circuit the DC plug of the AC Adapter/Charger or battery terminal with any metallic objects. This may cause a malfunction.
* '''UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTER''' from the camcorder and wall socket when camcorder is not in use. Even if your camcorder is turned off, AC power is still supplied to it while connected to the wall outlet via the AC Adapter/Charger.
==OPERATING THE MENU==
# Set the '''POWER''' switch to ON
# Press the '''MENU''' button
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the icon of the desired menu is highlighted, then press the dial to select the menu.
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the desired menu item is highlighted, then press the dial to select the item.
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the desired setting is highlighted, the press the dial to select.
# Press the '''MENU''' button to hide the menu screen. To return to the previous screen, select '''RETURN'''.
*'''TIP''': You may select menu items with the </> buttons.
**'''NOTE''': The available menu items vary depending on the context of your camcorder during recording or playback.
==MEMORY CARDS==
APS supplies two, 32GB memory cards (installed) when you check out the HXR camcorder. This should provide you with ample recording time, even at the highest quality settings. Should you require additional memory cards for your production, you can use "Memory Stick PRO Duo" media, "Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo" media, SD memory cards and, SDHC memory cards.
* '''Remember to re-install the memory cards supplied by APS before returning the camera should you choose to use your own media to avoid charges.'''
Before recording, format the memory card(s).
# With the camcorder powered on, press the '''MODE''' button.
# Touch '''MANAGE MEDIA''' setting '''MEDIA FORMAT'''
# Select the recording media to be formatted
# Select YES. The HXR will ask you to verify your selection.
*'''TIP''': The easiest way to retrieve your files is to make a disk image of the memory card. You can check out a card reader from Media Loan and use the MML or Non-Linear Editing Suites to make your disk image(s). You can then use Final Cut Pro/Adobe Premiere to log and transfer your video for editing.
** '''NOTE''': While [Executing...] is displayed, do not operate the buttons on the camcorder, disconnect the AC Adapter/Charger, or removing recording media from the camcorder. (The access lamp is light or flashing while formatting recording media.)
===NOTES ON RECORDING===
'''Estimated Recording Time on one 32 GB card in minutes with HD Audio Format set to Linear PCM/Dolby Digital:'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! AVCHD 24M (FX) !! AVCHD 17M (FH) !! AVCHD 9M (HQ) !! AVCHD 5M (LP)
|-
| 170/180 || 225/235 || 385/435 || 605/750
|}
* When the access lamp is lit or flashing red, the camcorder is writing data on the recording media. Do not remove the battery pack or the AC Adapter/Charger.
* If a movie file exceeds 2GB during recording, the camcorder divides the file and create a new file automatically.
* The menu settings are stored in your camcorder when you turn the '''POWER''' switch to OFF. Do not remove battery pack or AC Adapter/Charger.
==RECORDING==
# Open the shutter of the lens hood.
# Slide the '''POWER''' switch to ON while pressing the green button.
The recording lamp lights up during recording.
To STOP recording, press the record button or the handle record button again.
*'''TIP''': When recording in high definition image quality (HD), the aspect ratio is fixed to 16:9. When recording in standard definition image quality (SD), you can switch the aspect ratio to 4:3.
*'''TIP''': For low angle recording, the handle record button is convenient. Release the '''HOLD''' lever to enable the handle record button. It might be helpful if you set the LCD panel face up or close it after turning it face down, or life the viewfinder up during the low angle recording.
** '''NOTE''': the camcorder will switch from Memory Card A to Memory Card B just before space runs out on Card A (and vice versa). '''Do not eject memory card that is currently being used for recording. Replace only the memory card whose slot lamp is off.'''
===SELECTING RECORDING QUALITY===
You can set the recording image quality to high definition image quality (HD) or standard definition image quality (SD).
To change the setting:
# Press '''MENU'''
# Select REC/OUT settings
# Select REC SET
# Select HD/SD SET
===SELECTING THE RECORDING FORMAT===
You can select the recording format (bit-rate, image size, frame rate, scanning system). The default setting is HD 1080/60i FX/SD 480/60i HQ.
To change the setting value:
# Press '''MENU'''
# Select REC/OUT settings
# Select REC SET
# Select REC FORMAT
If you select HD 1080/60i FX (the default), movies are recorded with the following format:
* HD - High Definition image quality
* 1080 - Effective scanning lines
* 60 - Frame Rate
* i - Scanning system
* FX - Recording mode
====SETTING DESCRIPTION====
Bit Rate:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! FX !! FH !! HQ !! LP
|-
| Max 24 Mbps || Approx 17 Mbps || Approx 9 Mbps || Approx 5 Mbps
|}
Image Size:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! FX !! FH !! HQ !! SP
|-
| 1920x1080/1280x720 || 1920x1080/1280x720 || HD recording 1440x1080 SD recording 720x480 || 1440x1080
|}
Frame rate: 24,30 or 60
Scanning system:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! i !! p !! pSCAN
|-
| Interlaced || Progressive || Recording images of progressive scanning as interlace signal (60i)
|}
*'''NOTE''': The recording mode is fixed to FX or FH with the progressive scanning system.
*'''NOTE''': When the recording format is changed to or from 720/60p, you will be prompted to reboot the camcorder. Select YES. Otherwise, you cannot switch the recording format.
==ADJUSTING THE ZOOM==
===USING THE POWER ZOOM===
The power zoom lever is pressure sensitive. For a slower zoom use less pressure and for a faster zoom use more pressure.
*'''NOTE''': Be sure to keep your finger on the power zoom lever. If you move your finger off the power zoom lever, the operation sound of the power zoom lever mat also be recorded.
===USING THE HANDLE ZOOM===
* Set the handle zoom switch to VAR or FIX
* Press the handle zoom lever to zoom in or out
When you set the handle zoom switch to VAR, you can zoom in or out at variable speed.
When you set the handle zoom switch to FIX, you can zoom in or out at fixed speed set in HANDLE ZOOM.
You cannot use the handle zoom lever when the handle zoom switch is set to OFF.
===USING THE ZOOM RING===
You can zoom at the desired speed by turning the zoom ring. Fine adjustment is also possible.
Turn the zoom ring at moderate speed. If you turn it too fast, the zoom speed may lag behind the zoom ring rotation speed, or the operation sound of the zoom may also be recorded.
====ADJUSTING THE FOCUS MANUALLY====
# Set the FOCUS switch to MAN
# Rotate the focus ring and adjust the focus.
*'''TIP''': It is easier to focus on the subject when you use the zoom function. Move the power zoom lever towards T (telephoto) to adjust the focus, and then towards W (wide angle) to adjust the zoom/compose your shot recording.
====PUSH AUTO FOCUS====
Record the subject while pressing and holding the PUSH AUTO button. If you release the button, the setting returns to manual focusing. Use this function to shift the focus on one subject to another (Rack Focus). The scenes will shift smoothly.
==ADJUSTING THE IMAGE BRIGHTNESS==
You can adjust the image brightness by adjusting the iris, gain, shutter speed or by reducing the light volume with the ND Filter.
*'''NOTE''': You cannot use the back light function and the spotlight when iris, gain and shutter speed are adjusted manually.
*'''NOTE''': AE SHIFT is not effective temporarily while you adjust the iris, gain, and shutter speed manually.
===ADJUSTING THE IRIS===
You can manually adjust the iris to control the volume of the light entering the lens. By adjusting the iris, you can change or close the aperture of the lens, which is expressed as an F value between F1.6 and F11. The volume of the light increases the more you open the aperture (decreasing F value). The volume of light decreases the more that you close the aperture (increasing F value). The current F value appears on the screen.
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''IRIS''' button if "A" is displayed next to current iris value.
# Adjust the iris with the iris ring.
*'''TIP''': The F value becomes close to F3.4 as the zoom position changes from W to T even when you open the aperture by setting the F value low then F3.4, such as F1.6.
*'''TIP''': The range of focus, an important effect of the aperture, is called depth of field. The depth of field gets shallower as the aperture is opened and deeper as the aperture is closed.
===ADJUSTING THE GAIN===
You can adjust the gain manually when you do not want to use the AGC (Automatic Gain Control).
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL'''switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''GAIN''' button if "A" is displayed next to current gain value.
# Set the gain switch to H,M or L. The gain value set for the selected fain switch position appears on the screen. You can set the gain value for each gain switch from [GAIN SET] of the (CAMERA SET) menu.
===GAIN SET===
you can set gain values for H, M, and L positions of the '''GAIN''' switch. The default settings of [H], [M] and [L] are 18 dB, 9 dB, and 0 dB respectively.
# Press the '''MENU''' button, select CAMERA SET then GAIN SET.
# Select [H], [M] or [L] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Set the gain value with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial, then press the dial. You can select the value between -6 dB and -21 dB by 3 dB. The larger the value, the higher the gain.
# Select [OK] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Press the '''MENU''' button to hide the menu screen.
====SMOOTH GAIN====
You can set the transition speed at which the gain setting shifts from one value to another, set for the '''GAIN''' switch positions, when you switch the '''GAIN''' switch from a position to another. You can select the transition speed from [FAST], [MIDDLE] and [SLOW] or set to [OFF]. The default setting is [OFF].
===ADJUSTING THE SHUTTER SPEED===
You can manually adjust and fix the shutter speed. You can make a moving object look still or emphasize the movement of a moving subject by adjusting the shutter speed.
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch
# Press the '''SHUTTER SPEED''' button until the shutter speed value is highlighted.
# Change the shutter speed displayed on the screen by turning the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial. You can adjust the shutter speed in a range 1/4 second through 1/10000 second. The denominator of the set shutter speed appears on the screen when you set the shutter speed to 1/100 second. The larger the value on the screen, the faster the shutter speed.
# Press the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to lock the shutter speed. To readjust the shutter speed, do steps 2 to 4 again.
===ADJUSTING THE ND FILTER===
You can record the subject clearly by using the ND filter when the recording environment is too bright. The ND filters 1, 2, and 3 reduce the volume of light to about 1/4, 1/16 and 1/64 respectively.
If ND1 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 1. If ND2 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 2. If ND3 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 3. The ND filter indicator will stop flashing and remain on the screen.
If NDOFF flashes set the ND filter to off. The ND filter icon will disappear from the screen.
*'''NOTE''': If you change the ND filter to OFF, the ND filter icon will disappear from the screen.
*'''NOTE''': When adjusting the iris manually, the ND filter icon does not flash even if the light volume should be adjusted with the ND filter.
*'''NOTE''': If the camcorder cannot detect the ND filter position (OFF/1/2/3), ND flashes on the screen. Make sure that the ND filter is set correctly.
**'''TIP''': While recording a bright subject, diffraction may occur if you close the aperture further down, resulting in a fuzzy focus (this is a common phenomenon with video cameras). The ND filter suppresses this phenomenon and gives better recording results.
===WHITE BALANCE===
You can adjust and fix white balance according to the lighting conditions of recording environment. You can store white balance values in memory A and memory B. Unless a white balance is readjusted, values will remain even after the power has been turned off.
====SETTING WHITE BALANCE====
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''WHT BAL''' button.
# Set the white balance memory switch to '''A''' or '''B'''.
# Capture a white subject, such as white paper, full-screen in the same lighting condition as the subject.
# Press the '''Custom WHT BAL''' button (one push) WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B starts flashing rapidly. It will stay on when the white balance adjustment is completed and the adjusted value is stored in WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B.
*'''NOTE''': When a white balance adjustment value has not been obtained successfully, WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B turns from rapid flashing to slow flashing. Adjust the subject appropriately and set the shutter speed to auto or around 1/60, the try adjusting white balance again.
====ZEBRA STRIPING====
You can display a zebra pattern as a guide for adjusting brightness. Zebra stripes are the only real indication of lighting levels. The Zebra pattern is a stripe pattern displayed where the image will be overexposed over a certain level and detail will be lost.
You can select the brightness level between 70 and 100 or 100+. The default setting is [70]. 100 IRE is the upper limit of legal video and is the correct value of white. From The Filmmaker's Handbook: "It's an old cliché of "video lighting" that it's necessary to expose flesh tones consistently from shot to shot. For example at 65-70 percent on a waveform monitor. This approach is outmoded (if not racist). First, skin tone varies a lot from person to person, from pale white to dark black. If you use auto-iris on close-ups of people's faces, it will tend to expose everyone the same...Momentary use of of auto-iris is always good way to spot-check what the camera thinks the best average exposure should be, but don't neglect to use your eyes and your creative common sense" (pg. 191).
# Press the '''MENU''' button.
# Select DISPLAY SET with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select ZEBRA with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select the appropriate level.
*'''NOTE''': When you select [ON], the Zebra icon (a square with diagonal lines) and the brightness level appear on the screen. The zebra pattern will not be recorded with the image. the default setting is [OFF].
==AUDIO SETUP==
===CHANNEL SETTING===
# Select input with the '''CH1''' (INT MIC/INPUT 1) switch and the '''CH2''' (INT MIC/INPUT1/INPUT2).
# Set '''INPUT1''' to an appropriate position for the microphone connected to the INPUT1 jack.
* LINE: For inputting sound from an audio device.
* MIC: For inputting sound from an external microphone that does not support the +48V power source (phantom power).
* MIC+48V: For inputting sound from a device that supports the +48v power source, including the supplied microphone.
When you connect a microphone to the INPUT2 jack, set the INPUT2 switch to an appropriate position for that microphone.
'''WHEN THE CH1 SWITCH IS SET TO INT MIC'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! CH2 SWITCH POSITION !! INPUT CHANNEL !! SOURCE
|-
| INT MIC || Internal microphone (L) || CH1
|-
| INT MIC || Internal microphone (R) || CH2*)
|-
| INPUT1 || Internal microphone (mono) || CH1
|-
| INPUT1 || XLR INPUT1 || CH2**
|-
| INPUT2 || Internal microphone (mono) || CH1
|-
| INPUT2 || Internal microphone (mono) || CH2
|}
'''WHEN THE CH1 SWITCH IS SET TO INPUT1'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! CH2 SWITCH !! INPUT CHANNEL !! SOURCE
|-
| INT MIC || XLR INPUT1 || CH1
|-
| INT MIC || Internal microphone (mono) || CH2**
|-
| INPUT1 || XLR INPUT1 || CH1
|-
| INPUT1 || XLR INPUT1 || CH2**
|-
| INPUT2 || XLR INPUT1 || CH1
|-
| INPUT2 || XLR INPUT2 || CH2**
|}

* The recording level of channel 2 is synchronized with that of channel 1 when only the internal microphone is used. The recording level of channel 2 is controlled with '''CH1''' (AUDIO LEVEL) dial and the '''CH1''' (AUTO/MAN) switch.
* You can adjust the recording levels of channel 1 and channel 2 separately.
*'''NOTE''': Do not operate the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' switches during recording to prevent noise from being recorded.
*'''NOTE''': When you connect a device that supports the +48V power source to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, set the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' switches to MIC+48v prior to connecting the device. When you disconnect the device, set the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' switch to MIC first, then disconnect it.
*'''NOTE''': When you connect a microphone that does not support the +48V power source to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, set the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' to MIC. If you use it with the INPUT1/INPUT2 switch set to MIC+48V, it may damage or the recorded sound be distorted.

===ADJUSTING THE VOLUME===
You can adjust the volume of an internal microphone or a microphone connected to the INPUT1/INPUT2 jack.
# Set '''AUTO/MAN''' (CH1/CH2) switch of the channel to be adjust to MAN.
# Turn the '''AUDIO LEVEL''' dial to adjust the volume during recording or standby.
===SETTING THE HEADPHONE SOUND===
You can select the channel, CH1 or Ch2, to output from the headphone. You can select the channel, Ch1 or CH2 or Stereo Mix, to output from the headphone.
==TIME CODE and USER BIT==
The camcorder records movies accompanied by time data, such as time code and user bit. Display the setting screen by pressing the '''MENU''' and select (TC/UB SET) with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
You can synchronize the time code of this camcorder with the time code of another camcorder.
===PRESETTING THE TIME CODE===
# Select [TC PRESET] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select [PRESET] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select the first 2 digits with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial. You can set the time code between 00:00:00:00 and 23:59:59:29.
# Set other digits by repeating step 3.
# Select [OK] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
===TO RESET THE TIME CODE===
You can reset the time code (00:00:00:00). Select [RESET] in step 2 of "PRESETTING THE TIME CODE."
===PRESETTING THE USER BIT===
# Select [UB PRESET] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select [PRESET] with the '''SE:/PRESET EXEC''' dial.
# Select the first 2 digits with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Set other digits by repeating step 3.
# Select [OK] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
===TO RESET THE USER BIT===
You can reset the user bit (00 00 00 00) Select [RESET in step 2 of "PRESETTING THE USER BIT."
==PLAYBACK==
Press the '''VISUAL INDEX''' button or the '''MODE''' button followed by touching '''PLAY''' then [VISUAL INDEX] on the screen. To play back movies, touch recording media you want to play back. Touch the playback mode and select the desired image quality of movies. Touch the thumbnail of the movie you want to play twice.
[[Category:Media Loan]]

Canon Rebel XSi Operating Guide

2020-02-11T17:35:36Z

Williaas:

Canon Rebel XSi Operating Guide

2020-02-11T17:34:28Z

Williaas: Williaas moved page Canon Rebel XT / XSi Operating Guide to Canon Rebel XSi Operating Guide

Canon Rebel XT / XSi Operating Guide

2020-02-11T17:34:28Z

Williaas: Williaas moved page Canon Rebel XT / XSi Operating Guide to Canon Rebel XSi Operating Guide

#REDIRECT [[Canon Rebel XSi Operating Guide]]

Canon Rebel XSi Operating Guide

2020-02-11T17:33:51Z

Williaas:

Canon Rebel XSi Operating Guide

2020-02-11T17:28:08Z

Williaas:

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2020-02-11T16:52:17Z

Williaas: /* Custom White Balance */

[[File:6d_1.jpg|600x600px]]

=INTRODUCTION=
{{#ev:vimeo|159257397|500|right|APS Canon 6D Kit}}

{{#ev:vimeo|159256566|500|left|General Access Canon 6D Kit}} 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

'''[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]'''

'''Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test.]'''

The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.

Media Loan's other major DSLR is the Canon Rebel. Compared to the Rebel T5i, the 6D has:
* 30% better image quality
* Water sealing
* Longer battery life (2x more photos per battery charge)
* More light sensitivity - 2 f-stops
* 20% better resolution (20.9MP vs. 17.9)

...and more!

[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]

There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes. They include:
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens
* 1x remote kit
* 1x battery grip
* 1x battery charger
* 1x class 10 memory card
* 3x batteries

 
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are cine, manual, and prime, with an f/1.5. The kit includes:
* 1x shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.
* 1x 24mm lens
* 1x 35mm lens
* 1x 85mm lens
* 2x variable ND (neutral density) filters
* 3x batteries and a
* 1x plug in power supply
* 1x class 10 memory card
 
 
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits] 

Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.
 

=CARING FOR THE CANON 6D=
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]
<nowiki>*</nowiki>NEVER LEAVE THE CAMERA BODY ANYWHERE BUT IN THE KIT -- THE SCREEN AND OTHER SENSITIVE INSTRUMENTS CAN GET SCRATCHED OR RUINED!*

Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''': 
Drop this camera 
Point camera toward Sun 
Submerge this camera in water 
Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field! 
Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car 
Store this camera in excessive heat or cold 
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera 
Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals 
'''Mount an EF-S Lens onto the body''' 
Use excessive physical force 
Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

====EF-S Lenses:====
EF-S Mount lenses ''cannot'' be used with the 6D. The back of EF-S lenses extends too far back into the camera body and could damage the mirror or sensor. ONLY USE EF LENSES WITH THE 6D. All of the EF-S lenses at Media Loan are noted as such on their case, as well as on the lens itself. If you want to use any lenses other than the lens(es) that come with the kit, you need to check with the Media Loan staff.

=Quick Exposure Settings Guide=
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.'''
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q. This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off. Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed. To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.

=FRONT CONTROLS=
===Depth-of-Field Preview button===
[[File:depth_preview.png]]

This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)

===Lens Release Button===
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.

=TOP CONTROLS=

[[file:6d_2.jpg|400px|left|thumb|Canon 6D Top Controls]]
 
 
 
 
 
 

Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.
===Exposure Mode (Top left knob)===
Use this knob to set the exposure mode. Use M for full manual mode. The other settings will have some automatic features, depending on the mode you select.
===Top Main Dial===
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.

===AF Mode===
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.

You select between autofocus and manual focus with the switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.

===Drive===
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press the DRIVE button and move the top dial to change the drive mode. The settings are: 

[[file:6d_drive.png]]

===ISO (sensitivity to light)===
ISO sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. The higher the ISO, the more noise there will be in your image. Try to keep the ISO as low as possible. To adjust ISO, press ISO and turn the top dial.

===Metering===
Use the following chart to determine which metering mode you should use. Change the metering mode by pressing the meter button above the top LCD panel. 

[[file:6d_meter.png]]

===LCD Dial Light===
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.

=REAR CONTROLS=
[[File:6d_3.jpg|400px|left|thumb|Canon 6D Rear View]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

====MENU Button====
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings (see notes below).
====INFO Button====
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. Pressing INFO multiple times will display an electronic level.

====Diopter Control====
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.
====Photo/Video Lever====
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.

====Start/Stop (Live View)====
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power. This button is also used to start/stop video recording.

====AF-ON Button====
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.
====Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button====
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.
====AF-Area Mode Button====
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.
====Magnification Button====
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.
====Play Button====
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.
====The Quick Control [Q] Button====
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.
====Master Controls====
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.

====Delete Button====
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.

=MENU SETTINGS=
Access the MENU to change various camera system settings, such as video/photo resolution and formats. The MENU is organized into various tabs. You can access the video settings in the MENU when the camera is set to video mode, and the photography settings when the camera is set to photo mode. 

'''Notes on settings:'''
====Movie Rec. Size====
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. 

'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use.

====Format card====
Format the memory card before returning your camera to Media Loan. This not only clears it for the next user, but it also ensures protection of your work. Make sure to transfer the files off of the card before you format. Select “low level format” to completely clear the information (without low level format, your data will be retrievable by certain computer programs).

====Video system====
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.

==== Custom White Balance ====
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.
 
'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.
 
'''Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.'''
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.
 
[[File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png|none|thumb|100x100px]]

=REMOTE (GA Kit)=
The General Access kit comes with a remote, and there is multiple ways to use it. With this remote, 6D does not need to be in "remote" drive mode.

Steps for usage:
# Set the remote and receiver to the same channel. On each, remove the battery cover and flip the switch up to a matching channel (typically ch. 1). '''These must match'''.
# Plug the receiver into the corresponding input on the left side of the camera body.
# Power on the receiver and the camera.
# The shooting mode can be selected with the remote as well as the camera. The most direct way to use the remote is to set the camera to single shooting drive mode, and then use the remote to select your actual desired mode (single, continuous, BULB, and timer). The BULB function can be used two ways: two take quick, continuous shots (set the remote to bulb and the drive mode on the camera to continuous) and to take long exposures (set the remote to bulb and the exposure mode on the camera to BULB). In both uses, press the remote button one to start shooting and again to stop.
# If set to AF, hold the main button on the remote down halfway to focus. Press down all the way to take a picture in single shooting and timer modes. In burst mode, keep the button pressed to take multiple shots. In BULB, press the button once to open the shutter and a second time to close it.
# After a picture is take, you can hold the remote button halfway down again for a quick preview.

=SHOULDER RIG (APS Kit)=
The APS 6D kit can be checked out with a shoulder rig. This piece of equipment allows for stabilization of the camera. Please watch the APS Canon 6D Kit video at the top of this page to learn how to assemble this rig.

 

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2020-02-11T16:51:56Z

Williaas: /* Custom White Balance */

[[File:6d_1.jpg|600x600px]]

=INTRODUCTION=
{{#ev:vimeo|159257397|500|right|APS Canon 6D Kit}}

{{#ev:vimeo|159256566|500|left|General Access Canon 6D Kit}} 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

'''[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]'''

'''Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test.]'''

The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.

Media Loan's other major DSLR is the Canon Rebel. Compared to the Rebel T5i, the 6D has:
* 30% better image quality
* Water sealing
* Longer battery life (2x more photos per battery charge)
* More light sensitivity - 2 f-stops
* 20% better resolution (20.9MP vs. 17.9)

...and more!

[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]

There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes. They include:
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens
* 1x remote kit
* 1x battery grip
* 1x battery charger
* 1x class 10 memory card
* 3x batteries

 
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are cine, manual, and prime, with an f/1.5. The kit includes:
* 1x shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.
* 1x 24mm lens
* 1x 35mm lens
* 1x 85mm lens
* 2x variable ND (neutral density) filters
* 3x batteries and a
* 1x plug in power supply
* 1x class 10 memory card
 
 
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits] 

Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.
 

=CARING FOR THE CANON 6D=
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]
<nowiki>*</nowiki>NEVER LEAVE THE CAMERA BODY ANYWHERE BUT IN THE KIT -- THE SCREEN AND OTHER SENSITIVE INSTRUMENTS CAN GET SCRATCHED OR RUINED!*

Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''': 
Drop this camera 
Point camera toward Sun 
Submerge this camera in water 
Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field! 
Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car 
Store this camera in excessive heat or cold 
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera 
Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals 
'''Mount an EF-S Lens onto the body''' 
Use excessive physical force 
Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

====EF-S Lenses:====
EF-S Mount lenses ''cannot'' be used with the 6D. The back of EF-S lenses extends too far back into the camera body and could damage the mirror or sensor. ONLY USE EF LENSES WITH THE 6D. All of the EF-S lenses at Media Loan are noted as such on their case, as well as on the lens itself. If you want to use any lenses other than the lens(es) that come with the kit, you need to check with the Media Loan staff.

=Quick Exposure Settings Guide=
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.'''
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q. This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off. Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed. To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.

=FRONT CONTROLS=
===Depth-of-Field Preview button===
[[File:depth_preview.png]]

This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)

===Lens Release Button===
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.

=TOP CONTROLS=

[[file:6d_2.jpg|400px|left|thumb|Canon 6D Top Controls]]
 
 
 
 
 
 

Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.
===Exposure Mode (Top left knob)===
Use this knob to set the exposure mode. Use M for full manual mode. The other settings will have some automatic features, depending on the mode you select.
===Top Main Dial===
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.

===AF Mode===
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.

You select between autofocus and manual focus with the switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.

===Drive===
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press the DRIVE button and move the top dial to change the drive mode. The settings are: 

[[file:6d_drive.png]]

===ISO (sensitivity to light)===
ISO sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. The higher the ISO, the more noise there will be in your image. Try to keep the ISO as low as possible. To adjust ISO, press ISO and turn the top dial.

===Metering===
Use the following chart to determine which metering mode you should use. Change the metering mode by pressing the meter button above the top LCD panel. 

[[file:6d_meter.png]]

===LCD Dial Light===
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.

=REAR CONTROLS=
[[File:6d_3.jpg|400px|left|thumb|Canon 6D Rear View]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

====MENU Button====
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings (see notes below).
====INFO Button====
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. Pressing INFO multiple times will display an electronic level.

====Diopter Control====
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.
====Photo/Video Lever====
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.

====Start/Stop (Live View)====
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power. This button is also used to start/stop video recording.

====AF-ON Button====
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.
====Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button====
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.
====AF-Area Mode Button====
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.
====Magnification Button====
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.
====Play Button====
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.
====The Quick Control [Q] Button====
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.
====Master Controls====
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.

====Delete Button====
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.

=MENU SETTINGS=
Access the MENU to change various camera system settings, such as video/photo resolution and formats. The MENU is organized into various tabs. You can access the video settings in the MENU when the camera is set to video mode, and the photography settings when the camera is set to photo mode. 

'''Notes on settings:'''
====Movie Rec. Size====
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. 

'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use.

====Format card====
Format the memory card before returning your camera to Media Loan. This not only clears it for the next user, but it also ensures protection of your work. Make sure to transfer the files off of the card before you format. Select “low level format” to completely clear the information (without low level format, your data will be retrievable by certain computer programs).

====Video system====
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.

==== Custom White Balance ====
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.
 
'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.
 
'''Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.'''
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.
[[File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png|none|thumb|100x100px]]
=REMOTE (GA Kit)=
The General Access kit comes with a remote, and there is multiple ways to use it. With this remote, 6D does not need to be in "remote" drive mode.

Steps for usage:
# Set the remote and receiver to the same channel. On each, remove the battery cover and flip the switch up to a matching channel (typically ch. 1). '''These must match'''.
# Plug the receiver into the corresponding input on the left side of the camera body.
# Power on the receiver and the camera.
# The shooting mode can be selected with the remote as well as the camera. The most direct way to use the remote is to set the camera to single shooting drive mode, and then use the remote to select your actual desired mode (single, continuous, BULB, and timer). The BULB function can be used two ways: two take quick, continuous shots (set the remote to bulb and the drive mode on the camera to continuous) and to take long exposures (set the remote to bulb and the exposure mode on the camera to BULB). In both uses, press the remote button one to start shooting and again to stop.
# If set to AF, hold the main button on the remote down halfway to focus. Press down all the way to take a picture in single shooting and timer modes. In burst mode, keep the button pressed to take multiple shots. In BULB, press the button once to open the shutter and a second time to close it.
# After a picture is take, you can hold the remote button halfway down again for a quick preview.

=SHOULDER RIG (APS Kit)=
The APS 6D kit can be checked out with a shoulder rig. This piece of equipment allows for stabilization of the camera. Please watch the APS Canon 6D Kit video at the top of this page to learn how to assemble this rig.

 

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Canon Rebel T1i/T2i Operating Guide

2020-02-11T16:44:07Z

Williaas: /* Custom White Balance */

'''A proficiency test is required to check out this camera.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and [[Canon Rebel XT / XSi Operating Guide]] and complete the written portion of the [[Canon Rebel Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.
=== Caring for the Canon Rebel===
Media Loan has a limited number of Canon Rebel T1i/T2i cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''': Drop this camera Point camera toward Sun. Submerge this camera in water Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field! Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car Store this camera in excessive heat or cold Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals Use excessive physical force Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

===T1i / T2i Diagrams===
<gallery>
File:T2iBack.jpg|Camera Back
File:T2itop.jpg|Camera Top
File:T2iFront.jpg|Camera Front
</gallery>

===Battery===
To insert a battery into the Canon rebel, open the battery door found on the bottom of the camera by pulling on the latch and swinging the door open. The battery will slide into place and lock in. Close the battery door. The battery will only fit in one way, so if it does not seem to be working, the battery is not oriented correctly.

To charge the battery, slide it into the provided charger and then plug the charger into a standard 120 VAC outlet. '''DO NOT CHARGE MORE THAN 24 HRS'''. '''DO NOT USE ANY CHARGER OTHER THAN THE ONE PROVIDED WITH THE CAMERA'''.

When the camera is powered off, it takes several seconds to clean the sensor. Because of this, make sure that the "Sensor Cleaning" logo is no longer on the screen before removing the battery.
====Battery Life====
The Canon Rebel shows charge level in three stages: Battery OK, Battery Low, and Needs to be Charged. To conserve battery life, the Rebel will go into a sleep mode after a period of disuse. To wake the camera, press the shutter button down halfway. If you know you will not be using the camera, it is best to fully turn the camera off.

===Canon Rebel Lenses===
The Canon Rebel will accept any Canon EF of EF-S bayonet lenses. Media Loan has several different zoom and prime lenses that can be checked out alongside a Canon Rebel. Prime lenses (fixed focal length) are recommended for faster apertures and picture quality, while zoom lenses are recommended for changing shooting settings, or long telephoto applications.
====Removing and Replacing Lenses====
'''Please do not remove the included kit lens from the camera unless you intend to attach a different lens immediately.''' On the Canon Rebel, there is a half-circle shaped button on the right side of the lens mount (viewed from the front of the camera). To remove the lens, press this button, and turn the lens approximately 90 degrees clockwise. To attach a new lens, find the guide mark on the lens body. If it is an EF lens, the guide mark will be a red circle. If the lens is EF-S, the guide mark will be a white square. Line up the guide mark with the matching mark on the Canon rebel body, set the lens into the mount, and turn it approximately 90 degrees counter clockwise until it locks into place.
====Auto / Manual Focus Switch====
The Canon Rebel uses an in-lens focusing system, which is switched on and off on the body of the lens. Regardless of the settings on the camera body, if the switch on the lens is set to MF (Manual Focus), the camera will not perform AF (Auto Focus) functions.
====Image Stabilization====
Some canon lenses feature an optical IS (Image Stabilization) function. This can be useful for shooting fast-moving hand-held shots, shots in low-light environments, etc. Because the IS is optical, it will not deteriorate the quality of the image as digital image stabilization does. However, using the IS feature on a lens will drain the battery much faster. Due to power consumption concerns, we recommend that the IS be turned off when shooting from a tripod, or at high enough shutter speeds that hand movement will not be a concern. The IS controlled on the lens body, and if the lens has an IS feature, the switch will be next to the AF/MF switch next to the lens mount.

===Mode Dial===
<gallery>
File:T2iModes.jpg|
</gallery>
====A-DEP====
A-DEP (Automatic DEPth of Field) mode on the Canon Rebel is designed to maximize focus across a picture, and is primarily intended for landscapes or large groups of people. A-DEP must be used with AF turned on, as the camera will use the AF sensor array to search through the frame for the distance of all subjects, then determine aperture and shutter values to create a depth of field that will keep all subjects in focus. A-DEP is not recommended for moving subjects, portraits, or shots where foreground and background de-focus is desired. The only controllable exposure settings in A-DEP mode are ISO and Exposure compensation.
====M====
M (Manual) mode offers full control over all features on the Canon Rebel. All exposure settings and picture styles must be changed by the user. This allows for the most creative control over the camera, but also demands an understanding of the camera's features, and basic principals of photography. In manual mode, the shutter speed is controlled by the dial next to the shutter release button. Aperture is controlled by the same dial while the AV button on the back of the camera is pressed. ISO can be set by pressing the button on the top of the camera between the Mode Dial and the Shutter Speed Dial. While in M, you can choose Auto ISO.
====Av====
Av (Aperture Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed to let the user choose aperture values, and automatically determine shutter speed for correct exposure. While in Av mode, the dial next to the shutter button will control the aperture. ISO is controlled the same way as in M mode, and shutter speed is determined by the camera. Av mode is designed to let the user control depth of field in a shot (to customize deep of shallow focus), but may not be good for high speed subjects, as the camera may use a slow shutter speed to acquire correct exposure.
====Tv====
Tv (Shutter Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed for photography where shutter speed is crucial. In Tv mode, the shutter speed is controlled with the dial next to the shutter button. In this mode, the user determines shutter speed, and the camera will automatically determine an aperture value for correct exposure. ISO is controlled in the same manner as in M mode. Tv mode is designed for applications such as sports photography, where depth of field is not particularly important, but fast shutter speeds to minimize motion blur are desired.
====P====
P (Program Auto-Exposure) mode allows the camera to control both the shutter speed and the aperture value. Users may still set the ISO as in M mode. In P mode, the user may change the shutter / aperture combination by turning the dial next to the shutter button. When the user changes the shutter / aperture setting like this, the camera will automatically change both shutter speed and aperture value simultaneously to maintain correct exposure. This mode is good for shooting in rapidly changing environments, or learning how the combination of shutter and aperture change both exposure and visual elements within the picture.
====CA====
CA (Creative Auto) mode operates exactly like full automatic mode with several more user controlled options allowed. In CA mode, the user may turn the flash on or off, change exposure compensation, choose picture styles, and change the drive mode of the camera. All other values are locked to camera-control.
====Auto (Green Square)====
Auto mode locks all options into camera control. User cannot override any options on the camera, including exposure, picture style, or drive mode. Auto mode is not recommended for any shooting situation.
====Other Still Photo Modes====
The Canon Rebel has several specialized automatic modes, designed for various different applications. They mimic the manual control modes without giving the user any actual manual control of the camera. '''Flash Off''' mode runs like full auto, but locks out the flash. '''Portrait''' mode uses a wide aperture to defocus the background and emphasize the subject. '''Landscape''' mode uses a small aperture to create deep focus from the foreground to the background. '''Macro''' mode attempts to optimize exposure and shutter drive for close-up photography (NOTE: the close-focus distance of the rebel is determined by the lens, and will not change regardless of what mode the camera body is set to. To take photos with small subjects near the camera, check out a macro-specialized lens from Media Loan). '''Sports''' mode will use the fastest shutter speed possible to minimize motion blur in pictures. '''Night Portrait''' mode will fire the flash to get a clear photo of the foreground subject, and use a long shutter speed to capture the background. Although each of these modes has specific applications, manual camera modes will offer more control in any situation.

====Video====
Video mode in the Canon Rebel is a new an popular feature that will capture 1920x1080 video in 24p or 30p, or 1280x720 video in up to 60p. In the T1i, video can only go up to 1280x720, and exposure is limited to camera-controlled. The T2i has more advanced video features, and can record in 1920x1080, with full manual control over exposure settings. Both the T1i and the T2i allow for exposure compensation while in auto video mode, and when the T2i is set to manual exposure, it can be controlled using the same button / dial combination as M still photo mode.

===Camera Memory===
The T1i can use SD or SDHC memory cards. The T2i can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. Most Media Loan Rebels will come with a 16 gigabyte card already in the camera. If you wish to use your own card, make sure the speed rating is at least Class 4 for RAW photos, and Class 10 45mb/s for video.

To switch memory cards, open the door on the back of the camera's hand grip, and press the back of the memory card. The card will pop out far enough to grab the back. Remove the card. To insert a new card, make sure it is oriented correctly, and insert the new memory card until it stops.

===Metering Modes===
The Canon Rebel T1i and T2i both have four different modes to meter the lighting in a scene.
*'''Evaluative Metering''' is the camera's standard metering mode. It is suited for most shooting situations, including some moderate back-lighting of a subject.
*'''Partial Metering''' is effective when the background is significantly brighter or darker than the subject.
*'''Center-Weighted Average Metering''' takes the average of lighting across the frame with slight preference given to lighting in the center of the frame.
*'''Spot Metering''' meters from a small area in the center of the frame. Spot metering is the most accurate, but only accounts for a small part of the picture, so several meter readings may be necessary to evaluate the lighting of a scene.
===Shutter Drive Modes===
Shutter drive modes determine the way the camera will react when the shutter button is pressed.
*'''Single Shooting''' will take a picture each time the shutter button is fully depressed.
*'''Continuous Shooting''' will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down. The camera will take pictures as fast as the shutter mechanism and the data buffer will allow.'
*'''Self Timer / Remote Control''' will allow the shutter to be released via wired or wireless remote, or, if the shutter button is depressed, take a single shot after 10 seconds.
===Live View===
Both the T1i and T2i are capable of shooting in Live View mode. This will open up the mirror and the shutter in the camera body and display a live image from the camera's sensor on the screen. To turn live view on or off, press the button on the camera next to the eyepiece with the circular red Record logo and a small logo of the camera back. You can enable/disable Live View mode in the MENU.

While in Live View, auto focus will be severely limited. All video is shot in Live View mode. While the camera is in Live View, '''DO NOT''' point the camera at the sun, as the sensor is exposed and will be damaged. Note that the appearance of the image on the screen in live view mode does not reflect the brightness of the actual picture. Always use the meter or histogram, as the brightness of the LCD cannot be trusted.

While the camera is in video mode, live view mode will turn on automatically. In this case, the '''Live View''' button becomes the '''Record / Stop''' button for video recording.

===Aperture / Exposure Compensation Button===
The '''Aperture / Exposure Compensation''' button (Av +/-) allows control over the aperture while in manual shooting mode. While in other modes, the button controls exposure compensation, allowing the user to make the camera expose lighter or darker than the internal meter would under normal operation.

===Quick Control Button===
'''T2i ONLY''' - The '''Quick Control''' button allows camera settings to be controlled via the arrow keys. To use the quick control feature, press the '''Quick Control''' button and then use the arrow keys to select the setting you wish to change. For shutter speed and aperture value settings, the dial will change the value of the selection. For all other options, press '''Set''' to enter the sub-menu and choose the desired setting. The T1i does not have a quick control button, but this feature is always-on.

=== Custom White Balance ===
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.
 
'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.
 
'''Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.'''
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.
[[File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png|none|thumb|100x100px]]
 

===Display Button===
The '''Display''' (DISP) button on the camera will turn the the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the '''Display''' button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.

===Image Size and Quality===
All Rebels have a number of image size and quality options. In most cases, the best option is to shoot at the highest resolution and quality possible, but space and processing limitations can make high-resolution images impractical.
====RAW Images====
Raw images are a direct feed from the camera's image sensor. Due to this, Raw files are extremely large an versatile. Raw image files have far better dynamic range than JPEG image files. Settings such as ISO and White balance can be changed during post processing, because Raw image files do not bake info into the image.

====JPEG Images====
JPEG images are compressed image files that save memory space by removing some of the detail and dynamic range from photographs. Canon Rebels apply a noise reduction process during the creation of JPEG images, which can make images look smoother in low-ISO situations, but can create a large amount of digital artifacts in high-ISO images. The T1i and T2i both have various resolution and quality settings for JPEG image capture.

{| class="wikitable"
|+ Image Resolution and Quality Settings
! width="20%" |Image Quality Setting
! width="40%" |Image Resolution
! width="20%" |Image Type (File Extension)
! width="20%" |Approx Image Size (Megabytes)
|-
| Large Fine || 4752x3168 - T1i, 5184x3486 - T2i || .JPEG || 5.0 MB
|-
| Large Normal || 4752x3168 - T1i, 5184x3486 - T2i || .JPEG || 2.5 MB
|-
| Medium Fine || 3456x2304 - Both || .JPEG || 3.0 MB
|-
| Medium Normal || 3456x2304 - Both || .JPEG || 1.6 MB
|-
| Small Fine || 2353x1568 - T1i, 2592x1728 - T2i || .JPEG || 1.7 MB
|-
| Small Normal || 2353x1568 - T1i, 2592x1728 - T2i || .JPEG || 900 KB
|-
| RAW || 4752x3168 - T1i, 5184x3486 - T2i || .CR2 (Canon Raw) || 20.2 MB
|}

===Menu System===
<gallery>
File:T2iMenu.jpg|T2i Menu Screen
File:T2iMenuNav.jpg|Menu Navigation Buttons
</gallery>
The full menu system of the T2i can be accessed by pressing the '''Menu''' button on the back of the camera above the viewfinder. Image quality settings, picture style customization, memory management, screen brightness, and more are controlled from within the main menu. To navigate the menu system, use the horizontal arrow keys to move between tabs, and the vertical arrow keys to select options within the tabs. Use the '''Set''' button to choose the highlighted option. At any time you can return to the main menu by pressing the '''Menu''' button again, or the home screen by halfway depressing the '''Shutter Release'''.

===Video Mode===
Both the T1i and the T2i can record HD video. The T1i has limited frame rates and exposure options, while the T2i provides complete exposure control and more robust frame rate options.

====T1i Video====
To activate the T1i video mode, simply turn the mode dial to the far end with the movie camera icon. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. To choose resolution, enter the menu system, and look for the resolution setting option in the first tab.
*The T1i has no manual control over shutter or aperture while in video mode.
*While in 1920x1080 video resolution, the T1i can only record 20 frames per second, which will create jumpy motion in video. 1280x720 mode will record at 30 frames per second.

====T2i Video====
To activate the T2i video mode, simply turn the mode dial to the far end with the movie camera icon. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. To change the resolution and frame rate options, go to the first tab of the main menu (frame rates are listed next to the resolution). To switch between manual and automatic exposure controls, go to the '''Exposure''' option in the first tab of the main menu. While in manual exposure control, look at the bottom of the screen for light metering, shutter speed, f-stop and ISO. These options are controlled identically to '''Manual''' still photo mode.

[[Category:Media_Loan]]

Canon Rebel T5i/T6i/T7i Gear Guide

2020-02-11T16:43:24Z

Williaas:

'''A proficiency test is required to check out this camera.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide, and complete the written portion of the [[Canon Rebel Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes. 
*[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/8/8b/Rebel_t5i_guide.pdf Canon Rebel T5i Complete Manual]

== Caring for the Canon Rebel==
Media Loan has a limited number of Canon Rebel cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''':
 
Drop this camera
 
Point camera toward Sun.
 
Submerge this camera in water
 
Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
 
Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car
 
Store this camera in excessive heat or cold
 
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
 
Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
 
Use excessive physical force 
Touch the mirror or sensor
 
Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

== New Features to the T5i/T6i==
The newer Rebel models have a separate video mode switch, a flip-out LCD monitor, touch screen functionality, and a depth-of-field preview button.

===LCD Flip-out Screen===
The T5i/T6i are the only cameras at Media Loan that have a flip-out LCD monitor. To flip the monitor out, pull on the right side of the screen. When it is swung out you can rotate it up, down, or over 180 degrees to face the subject. This allows you to view your Live View image or exposure settings from various angles.

===Touch Screen===
The LCD screen monitor on the T5i/T6i has touch screen capabilities, unlike the other Rebel models available at Media Loan. You can use the touch screen to navigate the MENU, adjust settings, and change exposure. It is automatically activated in Live View mode and the MENU; with Live View off you will need to press the Q button to activate the touch screen and navigate the Q Menu. Touch screen can be enabled/disabled in the MENU. The touch shutter function, activated in Live View mode, enables you to take a picture by simply tapping the LCD screen with your finger.

==T5i/T6i Differences==
The Canon Rebel T5i and T6i are very similar in design and functionality. They are both equipped with the same censor, the APS-C 332.3mm2 and have the same ISO range of 100-12,800. Media Loan has very few T6i’s available. Here are the major differences between these models: 
* Megapixels: 18MP – T5i vs. 24.2MP – T6i 
* Pixels: T5i – Bigger pixels, better in low-light vs. T6i – More pixels, higher resolution 
* Even though they have the same ISO range, the T6i handles noise better 
* The T6i has more Auto-Focus (AF) points 
They have slight differences in exterior buttons, explained below.

==T5i Diagrams==
<gallery>
File:T5i front.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i back.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i Dial.jpg|T5i front diagram
</gallery>

==T6i Diagrams==
<gallery>

</gallery>
[[File:Canon T6i Front Diagram.png|none|thumb|186x186px|T6i Front Diagram ]]
[[File:Canon Rebel T6i Back Diagram.png|none|thumb|177x177px|T6i Back Diagram]]
[[File:Canon T6i Mode Dial.png|none|thumb|178x178px]]

==Battery==
To insert a battery into the Canon Rebel:
# Open the battery door located on the bottom of the camera by pulling on the latch and swinging the door open.
# Align the battery attachment on the camera to the attachment in the slot.
# Slide the battery into place and lock it in.
# Close the battery door.
 

The battery will only fit in one way, so if it does not seem to be working, the battery is not oriented correctly. When the camera is powered off, it takes several seconds to clean the sensor. Because of this, make sure that the "Sensor Cleaning" logo is no longer on the screen before removing the battery. 
To charge the battery, slide it into the provided charger and then plug the charger into a standard 120 VAC outlet. '''Do not charge more than 24 hours. Do not use any charger other than the one provided with the camera.''' 

===Battery Life===
The Canon Rebel shows charge level in three stages: "Battery OK", "Battery Low", and "Needs to be Charged". To conserve battery life, the Rebel will go into a sleep mode after a period of disuse with default settings. To wake the camera, press the shutter button down halfway. If you know you will not be using the camera, it is best to fully turn the camera off.

==Camera Memory==
The T5i/T6i can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. Most Media Loan Rebels will come with a 16 gigabyte card already in the camera. If you wish to use your own card, make sure the speed rating is at least Class 4 for RAW photos, and Class 10 45mb/s for video. 
To switch memory cards, open the door on the back of the camera's hand grip, and press the back of the memory card. The card will pop out far enough to grab the back. Remove the card. To insert a new card, make sure it is oriented correctly, and insert the new memory card until it stops.

==Canon Rebel Lenses==
The Canon Rebel will accept any Canon EF of EF-S bayonet lenses. Media Loan has several different zoom and prime lenses that can be checked out alongside a Canon Rebel. Prime lenses (fixed focal length) are recommended for faster apertures and picture quality, while zoom lenses are recommended for changing shooting settings, or long telephoto applications.
===Removing and Replacing Lenses===
'''Please do not remove the included kit lens from the camera unless you intend to attach a different lens immediately.''' On the Canon Rebel, there is a half-circle shaped button on the right side of the lens mount (viewed from the front of the camera). To remove the lens, press this button, and turn the lens approximately 90 degrees clockwise. To attach a new lens, find the guide mark on the lens body. If it is an EF lens, the guide mark will be a red circle. If the lens is EF-S, the guide mark will be a white square. Line up the guide mark with the matching mark on the Canon rebel body, set the lens into the mount, and turn it approximately 90 degrees counter clockwise until it locks into place.
===Auto / Manual Focus Switch===
The Canon Rebel uses an in-lens focusing system, which is switched on and off on the body of the lens. Regardless of the settings on the camera body, if the switch on the lens is set to MF (Manual Focus), the camera will not perform AF (Auto Focus) functions.
===Image Stabilization===
Some canon lenses feature an optical IS (Image Stabilization) function. This can be useful for shooting fast-moving hand-held shots, shots in low-light environments, etc. Because the IS is optical, it will not deteriorate the quality of the image as digital image stabilization does. However, using the IS feature on a lens will drain the battery much faster. Due to power consumption concerns, we recommend that the IS be turned off when shooting from a tripod, or at high enough shutter speeds that hand movement will not be a concern. The IS controlled on the lens body, and if the lens has an IS feature, the switch will be next to the AF/MF switch next to the lens mount.

==Controls==
The T6i has two added buttons on top of the camera body, above the Mode Dial: DISP. and one for Auto-Focus (AF) functionality. The DISP. button will turn the LCD screen on/off when Live View is disengaged, and the AF allows for quick access to Auto-Focus settings.
===Mode Dial===
<gallery>

</gallery>
====A-DEP====
A-DEP (Automatic DEPth of Field) mode on the Canon Rebel is designed to maximize focus across a picture, and is primarily intended for landscapes or large groups of people. A-DEP must be used with AF turned on, as the camera will use the AF sensor array to search through the frame for the distance of all subjects, then determine aperture and shutter values to create a depth of field that will keep all subjects in focus. A-DEP is not recommended for moving subjects, portraits, or shots where foreground and background de-focus is desired. The only controllable exposure settings in A-DEP mode are ISO and Exposure compensation.

====M====
M (Manual) mode offers full control over all features on the Canon Rebel. All exposure settings and picture styles must be changed by the user. This allows for the most creative control over the camera, but also demands an understanding of the camera's features, and basic principals of photography. In manual mode, the shutter speed is controlled by the dial next to the shutter release button. Aperture is controlled by the same dial while the AV button on the back of the camera is pressed. ISO can be set by pressing the button on the top of the camera between the Mode Dial and the Shutter Speed Dial. While in M, you can choose Auto ISO.

====Av====
Av (Aperture Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed to let the user choose aperture values, and automatically determine shutter speed for correct exposure. While in Av mode, the dial next to the shutter button will control the aperture. ISO is controlled the same way as in M mode, and shutter speed is determined by the camera. Av mode is designed to let the user control depth of field in a shot (to customize deep of shallow focus), but may not be good for high speed subjects, as the camera may use a slow shutter speed to acquire correct exposure.

====Tv====
Tv (Shutter Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed for photography where shutter speed is crucial. In Tv mode, the shutter speed is controlled with the dial next to the shutter button. In this mode, the user determines shutter speed, and the camera will automatically determine an aperture value for correct exposure. ISO is controlled in the same manner as in M mode. Tv mode is designed for applications such as sports photography, where depth of field is not particularly important, but fast shutter speeds to minimize motion blur are desired.

====P====
P (Program Auto-Exposure) mode allows the camera to control both the shutter speed and the aperture value. Users may still set the ISO as in M mode. In P mode, the user may change the shutter / aperture combination by turning the dial next to the shutter button. When the user changes the shutter / aperture setting like this, the camera will automatically change both shutter speed and aperture value simultaneously to maintain correct exposure. This mode is good for shooting in rapidly changing environments, or learning how the combination of shutter and aperture change both exposure and visual elements within the picture.

====CA====
CA (Creative Auto) mode operates exactly like full automatic mode with several more user controlled options allowed. In CA mode, the user may turn the flash on or off, change exposure compensation, choose picture styles, and change the drive mode of the camera. All other values are locked to camera-control.

====Auto (Green Square)====
Auto mode locks all options into camera control. User cannot override any options on the camera, including exposure, picture style, or drive mode. Auto mode is not recommended for any shooting situation.

====Other Still Photo Modes====
The Canon Rebel has several specialized automatic modes, designed for various different applications. They mimic the manual control modes without giving the user any actual manual control of the camera. '''Flash Off''' mode runs like full auto, but locks out the flash. '''Portrait''' mode uses a wide aperture to defocus the background and emphasize the subject. '''Landscape''' mode uses a small aperture to create deep focus from the foreground to the background. '''Macro''' mode attempts to optimize exposure and shutter drive for close-up photography (NOTE: the close-focus distance of the rebel is determined by the lens, and will not change regardless of what mode the camera body is set to. To take photos with small subjects near the camera, check out a macro-specialized lens from Media Loan). '''Sports''' mode will use the fastest shutter speed possible to minimize motion blur in pictures. '''Night Portrait''' mode will fire the flash to get a clear photo of the foreground subject, and use a long shutter speed to capture the background. Although each of these modes has specific applications, manual camera modes will offer more control in any situation.

===Video Mode===
The T5i/T6i cameras have full-manual HD video functionality. Unlike other Rebel models at Media Loan, the video mode on the T5i/T6i is activated on the same switch '''near the Mode Dial as ON/OFF'''. This allows the user to easily change '''exposure modes with the mode dial''' while shooting video. 
Turn the switch to the video camera icon to engage video mode. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate '''(the Q menu is disabled in video mode)'''. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. You can change the exposure and image settings the same way in video mode as in photo mode (exterior buttons, touch screen). You can also adjust image settings in the '''MENU'''. Pressing '''INFO''' will display more or less information.
===Aperture / Exposure Compensation Button===
The '''Aperture / Exposure Compensation''' button (Av +/-) allows control over the aperture while in manual shooting mode. While in other modes, the button controls exposure compensation, allowing the user to make the camera expose lighter or darker than the internal meter would under normal operation.

===Quick Control Button (Q) / Q Menu===
The '''Quick Control (Q)''' button allows camera settings to be controlled via the cross keys when the '''Q Menu''' is engaged. To use the quick control feature, turn off Live View and press the Q button. You can then use the cross keys to select the setting you wish to change.

===Display Button===
'''T6i ONLY'''. The '''Display''' (DISP) button on the camera will turn the the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the '''Display''' button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.

===Info Button===
The '''INFO''' button on the camera will turn the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the INFO button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.
When Live View mode is engaged, the INFO button will display exposure settings on the LCD screen. Press the INFO button multiple times to display more or less settings.

===Depth-of-field Preview Button===
The aperture opening changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD screen, the depth of field will look narrow. Press the depth-of-field preview button (located on the camera body near the lens mount) to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the actual depth of field (range of acceptable focus). This will darken the viewfinder considerably. This button can also be used to display the exposure settings in the bottom of the viewfinder.

==Live View==
Both the T5i/T6i are capable of shooting in Live View mode. This will open up the mirror and the shutter in the camera body and display a live image from the camera's sensor on the screen. To turn live view on or off, press the button on the camera next to the eyepiece with the circular red Record logo and a small logo of the camera back. You can enable/disable Live View mode in the MENU.
While in Live View, auto focus will be severely limited. All video is shot in Live View mode. While the camera is in Live View, '''DO NOT''' point the camera at the sun, as the sensor is exposed and will be damaged. Note that the appearance of the image on the screen in live view mode does not reflect the brightness of the actual picture. Always use the meter or histogram, as the brightness of the LCD cannot be trusted.
While the camera is in video mode, live view mode will turn on automatically. In this case, the '''Live View''' button becomes the '''Record / Stop''' button for video recording.

==Metering Modes==
The Canon Rebels have built-in light meter systems. The metering modes measure the light of an image in order to determine whether or not it is properly exposed. The light meter is displayed in multiple places, including in the bottom of the viewfinder, in the Q Menu, and the bottom of the LCD screen in Live View mode. 
T5i/T6i both have four different modes to meter the lighting in a scene. 
* '''Evaluative Metering''' is the camera's standard metering mode. It is suited for most shooting situations, including some moderate back-lighting of a subject. 
* '''Partial Metering''' is effective when the background is significantly brighter or darker than the subject. 
* '''Center-Weighted Average Metering''' takes the average of lighting across the frame with slight preference given to lighting in the center of the frame. 
* '''Spot Metering''' meters from a small area in the center of the frame. Spot metering is the most accurate, but only accounts for a small part of the picture, so several meter readings may be necessary to evaluate the lighting of a scene.

==Shutter Drive Modes==
Shutter drive modes determine the way the camera will react when the shutter button is pressed. The T5i/T6i both have: 
* '''Single Shooting''' will take a picture each time the shutter button is fully depressed. 
* '''Continuous Shooting''' will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down. The camera will take pictures as fast as the shutter mechanism and the data buffer will allow. (max. aprox. 3 shots/second) 
* '''Self Timer / Remote Control''' will allow the shutter to be released via wired or wireless remote, or, if the shutter button is depressed, take a single shot after 2 or 10 seconds. 
The T6i has some additional drive features that the T5i doesn’t: 
* '''Single silent shooting''' is single shooting with less sound 
* '''Silent continuous shooting''' is continuous shooting with less sound 
* '''Self-timer: Continuous''' Press the up and down arrow keys to set the number of multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set number of multiple shots will be taken. 

==Image Size and Quality==
All Rebels have a number of image size and quality options. In most cases, the best option is to shoot at the highest resolution and quality possible, but space and processing limitations can make high-resolution images impractical.
===RAW Images===
Raw images are a direct feed from the camera's image sensor. Due to this, Raw files are extremely large and versatile. Raw image files have far better dynamic range than JPEG image files. Settings such as ISO and White balance can be changed during post processing, because Raw image files do not bake info into the image.

===JPEG Images===
JPEG images are compressed image files that save memory space by removing some of the detail and dynamic range from photographs. Canon Rebels apply a noise reduction process during the creation of JPEG images, which can make images look smoother in low-ISO situations, but can create a large amount of digital artifacts in high-ISO images. The T5i and T6i both have various resolution and quality settings for JPEG image capture.

=== Image-recording Quality Settings for the Canon Rebel T5i ===
[[File:Media Loan- Image Quality T5i.png|none|thumb|800x800px]]

==Menu System==
<gallery>
File:T2iMenu.jpg|T2i Menu Screen
File:T2iMenuNav.jpg|Menu Navigation Buttons
</gallery>
The full menu system of the Rebels can be accessed by pressing the '''MENU''' button on the back of the camera by the viewfinder. Image quality settings, picture style customization, memory management, screen brightness, and more are controlled from within the main menu. Use the cross keys to navigate the menu. Use the '''SET''' button to choose the highlighted option. At any time you can return to the main menu by pressing the '''MENU''' button again, or the home screen by halfway depressing the '''shutter release'''.

==Quick Exposure Settings Guide==
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the T5i/T6i. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder (enable with the depth-of-field preview button) and the LCD screen. The main ways to adjust exposure settings is with the top scroll wheel, the touch screen, set and cross keys, and the ISO and Av buttons. 
The exposure settings can be adjusted in multiple ways: 
* '''Exterior buttons:''' In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. To adjust the shutter speed, scroll back and forth with the top wheel. Aperture can be changed while holding down the Av button and scrolling with the top wheel. To adjust the ISO, press the ISO button (located on top of the camera near the mode dial) and then use the scroll wheel to make a selection. 
* '''Q Menu (Live View Off):''' Enable the Q menu by turning off Live View. You can then adjust exposure settings in manual shooting modes. Press the Q button to enable selections and set button to go into specific settings. You can use the touch screen instead of buttons, as well as the exterior buttons. 
* '''Live View:''' Enable the manipulation of the exposure settings in Live View by pressing the INFO button. Multiple depressions of INFO will enable various settings. Once engaged, you can use the touch screen or exterior buttons. 

== Custom White Balance ==
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.
 
'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.
 
'''Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.'''
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.
[[File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png|none|thumb|100x100px]]
 
== Putting your Media onto a Computer ==
There are two ways to put photos and videos onto a computer from you camera. 
* '''SD card:''' Remove the SD card from your camera. Use a card reader from media loan to connect it to the computer via a USB mini to USB A cable. a folder should pop up automatically to the computer desktop, or be seen in the computer's file management system like Apples “Finder”. Remember to “eject” the folder before disconnecting the SD card.
* '''Direct connection:''' Connect your camera to the computer using a USB mini to USB A cable. the cable connects to a socket on your camera labeled “A/V out Digital” behind a rubber flap. Once connected turn on you camera and open a photo viewing software like Apples “Photos” desktop application. Within the application, your photos from the camera should be available as a folder. It should work similarly on the equivalent Windows photo application.
[[Category:Media_Loan]]

Canon Rebel T5i/T6i/T7i Gear Guide

2020-02-11T16:42:49Z

Williaas:

'''A proficiency test is required to check out this camera.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide, and complete the written portion of the [[Canon Rebel Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes. 
*[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/8/8b/Rebel_t5i_guide.pdf Canon Rebel T5i Complete Manual]

== Caring for the Canon Rebel==
Media Loan has a limited number of Canon Rebel cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''':
 
Drop this camera
 
Point camera toward Sun.
 
Submerge this camera in water
 
Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
 
Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car
 
Store this camera in excessive heat or cold
 
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
 
Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
 
Use excessive physical force 
Touch the mirror or sensor
 
Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

== New Features to the T5i/T6i==
The newer Rebel models have a separate video mode switch, a flip-out LCD monitor, touch screen functionality, and a depth-of-field preview button.

===LCD Flip-out Screen===
The T5i/T6i are the only cameras at Media Loan that have a flip-out LCD monitor. To flip the monitor out, pull on the right side of the screen. When it is swung out you can rotate it up, down, or over 180 degrees to face the subject. This allows you to view your Live View image or exposure settings from various angles.

===Touch Screen===
The LCD screen monitor on the T5i/T6i has touch screen capabilities, unlike the other Rebel models available at Media Loan. You can use the touch screen to navigate the MENU, adjust settings, and change exposure. It is automatically activated in Live View mode and the MENU; with Live View off you will need to press the Q button to activate the touch screen and navigate the Q Menu. Touch screen can be enabled/disabled in the MENU. The touch shutter function, activated in Live View mode, enables you to take a picture by simply tapping the LCD screen with your finger.

==T5i/T6i Differences==
The Canon Rebel T5i and T6i are very similar in design and functionality. They are both equipped with the same censor, the APS-C 332.3mm2 and have the same ISO range of 100-12,800. Media Loan has very few T6i’s available. Here are the major differences between these models: 
* Megapixels: 18MP – T5i vs. 24.2MP – T6i 
* Pixels: T5i – Bigger pixels, better in low-light vs. T6i – More pixels, higher resolution 
* Even though they have the same ISO range, the T6i handles noise better 
* The T6i has more Auto-Focus (AF) points 
They have slight differences in exterior buttons, explained below.

==T5i Diagrams==
<gallery>
File:T5i front.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i back.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i Dial.jpg|T5i front diagram
</gallery>

==T6i Diagrams==
<gallery>

</gallery>
[[File:Canon T6i Front Diagram.png|none|thumb|186x186px|T6i Front Diagram ]]
[[File:Canon Rebel T6i Back Diagram.png|none|thumb|177x177px|T6i Back Diagram]]
[[File:Canon T6i Mode Dial.png|none|thumb|178x178px]]

==Battery==
To insert a battery into the Canon Rebel:
# Open the battery door located on the bottom of the camera by pulling on the latch and swinging the door open.
# Align the battery attachment on the camera to the attachment in the slot.
# Slide the battery into place and lock it in.
# Close the battery door.
 

The battery will only fit in one way, so if it does not seem to be working, the battery is not oriented correctly. When the camera is powered off, it takes several seconds to clean the sensor. Because of this, make sure that the "Sensor Cleaning" logo is no longer on the screen before removing the battery. 
To charge the battery, slide it into the provided charger and then plug the charger into a standard 120 VAC outlet. '''Do not charge more than 24 hours. Do not use any charger other than the one provided with the camera.''' 

===Battery Life===
The Canon Rebel shows charge level in three stages: "Battery OK", "Battery Low", and "Needs to be Charged". To conserve battery life, the Rebel will go into a sleep mode after a period of disuse with default settings. To wake the camera, press the shutter button down halfway. If you know you will not be using the camera, it is best to fully turn the camera off.

==Camera Memory==
The T5i/T6i can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. Most Media Loan Rebels will come with a 16 gigabyte card already in the camera. If you wish to use your own card, make sure the speed rating is at least Class 4 for RAW photos, and Class 10 45mb/s for video. 
To switch memory cards, open the door on the back of the camera's hand grip, and press the back of the memory card. The card will pop out far enough to grab the back. Remove the card. To insert a new card, make sure it is oriented correctly, and insert the new memory card until it stops.

==Canon Rebel Lenses==
The Canon Rebel will accept any Canon EF of EF-S bayonet lenses. Media Loan has several different zoom and prime lenses that can be checked out alongside a Canon Rebel. Prime lenses (fixed focal length) are recommended for faster apertures and picture quality, while zoom lenses are recommended for changing shooting settings, or long telephoto applications.
===Removing and Replacing Lenses===
'''Please do not remove the included kit lens from the camera unless you intend to attach a different lens immediately.''' On the Canon Rebel, there is a half-circle shaped button on the right side of the lens mount (viewed from the front of the camera). To remove the lens, press this button, and turn the lens approximately 90 degrees clockwise. To attach a new lens, find the guide mark on the lens body. If it is an EF lens, the guide mark will be a red circle. If the lens is EF-S, the guide mark will be a white square. Line up the guide mark with the matching mark on the Canon rebel body, set the lens into the mount, and turn it approximately 90 degrees counter clockwise until it locks into place.
===Auto / Manual Focus Switch===
The Canon Rebel uses an in-lens focusing system, which is switched on and off on the body of the lens. Regardless of the settings on the camera body, if the switch on the lens is set to MF (Manual Focus), the camera will not perform AF (Auto Focus) functions.
===Image Stabilization===
Some canon lenses feature an optical IS (Image Stabilization) function. This can be useful for shooting fast-moving hand-held shots, shots in low-light environments, etc. Because the IS is optical, it will not deteriorate the quality of the image as digital image stabilization does. However, using the IS feature on a lens will drain the battery much faster. Due to power consumption concerns, we recommend that the IS be turned off when shooting from a tripod, or at high enough shutter speeds that hand movement will not be a concern. The IS controlled on the lens body, and if the lens has an IS feature, the switch will be next to the AF/MF switch next to the lens mount.

==Controls==
The T6i has two added buttons on top of the camera body, above the Mode Dial: DISP. and one for Auto-Focus (AF) functionality. The DISP. button will turn the LCD screen on/off when Live View is disengaged, and the AF allows for quick access to Auto-Focus settings.
===Mode Dial===
<gallery>

</gallery>
====A-DEP====
A-DEP (Automatic DEPth of Field) mode on the Canon Rebel is designed to maximize focus across a picture, and is primarily intended for landscapes or large groups of people. A-DEP must be used with AF turned on, as the camera will use the AF sensor array to search through the frame for the distance of all subjects, then determine aperture and shutter values to create a depth of field that will keep all subjects in focus. A-DEP is not recommended for moving subjects, portraits, or shots where foreground and background de-focus is desired. The only controllable exposure settings in A-DEP mode are ISO and Exposure compensation.

====M====
M (Manual) mode offers full control over all features on the Canon Rebel. All exposure settings and picture styles must be changed by the user. This allows for the most creative control over the camera, but also demands an understanding of the camera's features, and basic principals of photography. In manual mode, the shutter speed is controlled by the dial next to the shutter release button. Aperture is controlled by the same dial while the AV button on the back of the camera is pressed. ISO can be set by pressing the button on the top of the camera between the Mode Dial and the Shutter Speed Dial. While in M, you can choose Auto ISO.

====Av====
Av (Aperture Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed to let the user choose aperture values, and automatically determine shutter speed for correct exposure. While in Av mode, the dial next to the shutter button will control the aperture. ISO is controlled the same way as in M mode, and shutter speed is determined by the camera. Av mode is designed to let the user control depth of field in a shot (to customize deep of shallow focus), but may not be good for high speed subjects, as the camera may use a slow shutter speed to acquire correct exposure.

====Tv====
Tv (Shutter Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed for photography where shutter speed is crucial. In Tv mode, the shutter speed is controlled with the dial next to the shutter button. In this mode, the user determines shutter speed, and the camera will automatically determine an aperture value for correct exposure. ISO is controlled in the same manner as in M mode. Tv mode is designed for applications such as sports photography, where depth of field is not particularly important, but fast shutter speeds to minimize motion blur are desired.

====P====
P (Program Auto-Exposure) mode allows the camera to control both the shutter speed and the aperture value. Users may still set the ISO as in M mode. In P mode, the user may change the shutter / aperture combination by turning the dial next to the shutter button. When the user changes the shutter / aperture setting like this, the camera will automatically change both shutter speed and aperture value simultaneously to maintain correct exposure. This mode is good for shooting in rapidly changing environments, or learning how the combination of shutter and aperture change both exposure and visual elements within the picture.

====CA====
CA (Creative Auto) mode operates exactly like full automatic mode with several more user controlled options allowed. In CA mode, the user may turn the flash on or off, change exposure compensation, choose picture styles, and change the drive mode of the camera. All other values are locked to camera-control.

====Auto (Green Square)====
Auto mode locks all options into camera control. User cannot override any options on the camera, including exposure, picture style, or drive mode. Auto mode is not recommended for any shooting situation.

====Other Still Photo Modes====
The Canon Rebel has several specialized automatic modes, designed for various different applications. They mimic the manual control modes without giving the user any actual manual control of the camera. '''Flash Off''' mode runs like full auto, but locks out the flash. '''Portrait''' mode uses a wide aperture to defocus the background and emphasize the subject. '''Landscape''' mode uses a small aperture to create deep focus from the foreground to the background. '''Macro''' mode attempts to optimize exposure and shutter drive for close-up photography (NOTE: the close-focus distance of the rebel is determined by the lens, and will not change regardless of what mode the camera body is set to. To take photos with small subjects near the camera, check out a macro-specialized lens from Media Loan). '''Sports''' mode will use the fastest shutter speed possible to minimize motion blur in pictures. '''Night Portrait''' mode will fire the flash to get a clear photo of the foreground subject, and use a long shutter speed to capture the background. Although each of these modes has specific applications, manual camera modes will offer more control in any situation.

===Video Mode===
The T5i/T6i cameras have full-manual HD video functionality. Unlike other Rebel models at Media Loan, the video mode on the T5i/T6i is activated on the same switch '''near the Mode Dial as ON/OFF'''. This allows the user to easily change '''exposure modes with the mode dial''' while shooting video. 
Turn the switch to the video camera icon to engage video mode. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate '''(the Q menu is disabled in video mode)'''. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. You can change the exposure and image settings the same way in video mode as in photo mode (exterior buttons, touch screen). You can also adjust image settings in the '''MENU'''. Pressing '''INFO''' will display more or less information.
===Aperture / Exposure Compensation Button===
The '''Aperture / Exposure Compensation''' button (Av +/-) allows control over the aperture while in manual shooting mode. While in other modes, the button controls exposure compensation, allowing the user to make the camera expose lighter or darker than the internal meter would under normal operation.

===Quick Control Button (Q) / Q Menu===
The '''Quick Control (Q)''' button allows camera settings to be controlled via the cross keys when the '''Q Menu''' is engaged. To use the quick control feature, turn off Live View and press the Q button. You can then use the cross keys to select the setting you wish to change.

===Display Button===
'''T6i ONLY'''. The '''Display''' (DISP) button on the camera will turn the the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the '''Display''' button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.

===Info Button===
The '''INFO''' button on the camera will turn the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the INFO button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.
When Live View mode is engaged, the INFO button will display exposure settings on the LCD screen. Press the INFO button multiple times to display more or less settings.

===Depth-of-field Preview Button===
The aperture opening changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD screen, the depth of field will look narrow. Press the depth-of-field preview button (located on the camera body near the lens mount) to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the actual depth of field (range of acceptable focus). This will darken the viewfinder considerably. This button can also be used to display the exposure settings in the bottom of the viewfinder.

==Live View==
Both the T5i/T6i are capable of shooting in Live View mode. This will open up the mirror and the shutter in the camera body and display a live image from the camera's sensor on the screen. To turn live view on or off, press the button on the camera next to the eyepiece with the circular red Record logo and a small logo of the camera back. You can enable/disable Live View mode in the MENU.
While in Live View, auto focus will be severely limited. All video is shot in Live View mode. While the camera is in Live View, '''DO NOT''' point the camera at the sun, as the sensor is exposed and will be damaged. Note that the appearance of the image on the screen in live view mode does not reflect the brightness of the actual picture. Always use the meter or histogram, as the brightness of the LCD cannot be trusted.
While the camera is in video mode, live view mode will turn on automatically. In this case, the '''Live View''' button becomes the '''Record / Stop''' button for video recording.

==Metering Modes==
The Canon Rebels have built-in light meter systems. The metering modes measure the light of an image in order to determine whether or not it is properly exposed. The light meter is displayed in multiple places, including in the bottom of the viewfinder, in the Q Menu, and the bottom of the LCD screen in Live View mode. 
T5i/T6i both have four different modes to meter the lighting in a scene. 
* '''Evaluative Metering''' is the camera's standard metering mode. It is suited for most shooting situations, including some moderate back-lighting of a subject. 
* '''Partial Metering''' is effective when the background is significantly brighter or darker than the subject. 
* '''Center-Weighted Average Metering''' takes the average of lighting across the frame with slight preference given to lighting in the center of the frame. 
* '''Spot Metering''' meters from a small area in the center of the frame. Spot metering is the most accurate, but only accounts for a small part of the picture, so several meter readings may be necessary to evaluate the lighting of a scene.

==Shutter Drive Modes==
Shutter drive modes determine the way the camera will react when the shutter button is pressed. The T5i/T6i both have: 
* '''Single Shooting''' will take a picture each time the shutter button is fully depressed. 
* '''Continuous Shooting''' will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down. The camera will take pictures as fast as the shutter mechanism and the data buffer will allow. (max. aprox. 3 shots/second) 
* '''Self Timer / Remote Control''' will allow the shutter to be released via wired or wireless remote, or, if the shutter button is depressed, take a single shot after 2 or 10 seconds. 
The T6i has some additional drive features that the T5i doesn’t: 
* '''Single silent shooting''' is single shooting with less sound 
* '''Silent continuous shooting''' is continuous shooting with less sound 
* '''Self-timer: Continuous''' Press the up and down arrow keys to set the number of multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set number of multiple shots will be taken. 

==Image Size and Quality==
All Rebels have a number of image size and quality options. In most cases, the best option is to shoot at the highest resolution and quality possible, but space and processing limitations can make high-resolution images impractical.
===RAW Images===
Raw images are a direct feed from the camera's image sensor. Due to this, Raw files are extremely large and versatile. Raw image files have far better dynamic range than JPEG image files. Settings such as ISO and White balance can be changed during post processing, because Raw image files do not bake info into the image.

===JPEG Images===
JPEG images are compressed image files that save memory space by removing some of the detail and dynamic range from photographs. Canon Rebels apply a noise reduction process during the creation of JPEG images, which can make images look smoother in low-ISO situations, but can create a large amount of digital artifacts in high-ISO images. The T5i and T6i both have various resolution and quality settings for JPEG image capture.

=== Image-recording Quality Settings for the Canon Rebel T5i ===
[[File:Media Loan- Image Quality T5i.png|none|thumb|800x800px]]

==Menu System==
<gallery>
File:T2iMenu.jpg|T2i Menu Screen
File:T2iMenuNav.jpg|Menu Navigation Buttons
</gallery>
The full menu system of the Rebels can be accessed by pressing the '''MENU''' button on the back of the camera by the viewfinder. Image quality settings, picture style customization, memory management, screen brightness, and more are controlled from within the main menu. Use the cross keys to navigate the menu. Use the '''SET''' button to choose the highlighted option. At any time you can return to the main menu by pressing the '''MENU''' button again, or the home screen by halfway depressing the '''shutter release'''.

==Quick Exposure Settings Guide==
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the T5i/T6i. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder (enable with the depth-of-field preview button) and the LCD screen. The main ways to adjust exposure settings is with the top scroll wheel, the touch screen, set and cross keys, and the ISO and Av buttons. 
The exposure settings can be adjusted in multiple ways: 
* '''Exterior buttons:''' In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. To adjust the shutter speed, scroll back and forth with the top wheel. Aperture can be changed while holding down the Av button and scrolling with the top wheel. To adjust the ISO, press the ISO button (located on top of the camera near the mode dial) and then use the scroll wheel to make a selection. 
* '''Q Menu (Live View Off):''' Enable the Q menu by turning off Live View. You can then adjust exposure settings in manual shooting modes. Press the Q button to enable selections and set button to go into specific settings. You can use the touch screen instead of buttons, as well as the exterior buttons. 
* '''Live View:''' Enable the manipulation of the exposure settings in Live View by pressing the INFO button. Multiple depressions of INFO will enable various settings. Once engaged, you can use the touch screen or exterior buttons. 

=== Custom White Balance ===
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.
 
'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.
 
'''Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.'''
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.
[[File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png|none|thumb|100x100px]]
 
== Putting your Media onto a Computer ==
There are two ways to put photos and videos onto a computer from you camera. 
* '''SD card:''' Remove the SD card from your camera. Use a card reader from media loan to connect it to the computer via a USB mini to USB A cable. a folder should pop up automatically to the computer desktop, or be seen in the computer's file management system like Apples “Finder”. Remember to “eject” the folder before disconnecting the SD card.
* '''Direct connection:''' Connect your camera to the computer using a USB mini to USB A cable. the cable connects to a socket on your camera labeled “A/V out Digital” behind a rubber flap. Once connected turn on you camera and open a photo viewing software like Apples “Photos” desktop application. Within the application, your photos from the camera should be available as a folder. It should work similarly on the equivalent Windows photo application.
[[Category:Media_Loan]]

Canon Rebel T5i/T6i/T7i Gear Guide

2020-02-11T16:40:53Z

Williaas: /* Custom White Balance */

'''A proficiency test is required to check out this camera.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide, and complete the written portion of the [[Canon Rebel Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes. 
*[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/8/8b/Rebel_t5i_guide.pdf Canon Rebel T5i Complete Manual]

== Caring for the Canon Rebel==
Media Loan has a limited number of Canon Rebel cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''':
 
Drop this camera
 
Point camera toward Sun.
 
Submerge this camera in water
 
Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
 
Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car
 
Store this camera in excessive heat or cold
 
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
 
Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
 
Use excessive physical force 
Touch the mirror or sensor
 
Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

== New Features to the T5i/T6i==
The newer Rebel models have a separate video mode switch, a flip-out LCD monitor, touch screen functionality, and a depth-of-field preview button.

===LCD Flip-out Screen===
The T5i/T6i are the only cameras at Media Loan that have a flip-out LCD monitor. To flip the monitor out, pull on the right side of the screen. When it is swung out you can rotate it up, down, or over 180 degrees to face the subject. This allows you to view your Live View image or exposure settings from various angles.

===Touch Screen===
The LCD screen monitor on the T5i/T6i has touch screen capabilities, unlike the other Rebel models available at Media Loan. You can use the touch screen to navigate the MENU, adjust settings, and change exposure. It is automatically activated in Live View mode and the MENU; with Live View off you will need to press the Q button to activate the touch screen and navigate the Q Menu. Touch screen can be enabled/disabled in the MENU. The touch shutter function, activated in Live View mode, enables you to take a picture by simply tapping the LCD screen with your finger.

==T5i/T6i Differences==
The Canon Rebel T5i and T6i are very similar in design and functionality. They are both equipped with the same censor, the APS-C 332.3mm2 and have the same ISO range of 100-12,800. Media Loan has very few T6i’s available. Here are the major differences between these models: 
* Megapixels: 18MP – T5i vs. 24.2MP – T6i 
* Pixels: T5i – Bigger pixels, better in low-light vs. T6i – More pixels, higher resolution 
* Even though they have the same ISO range, the T6i handles noise better 
* The T6i has more Auto-Focus (AF) points 
They have slight differences in exterior buttons, explained below.

==T5i Diagrams==
<gallery>
File:T5i front.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i back.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i Dial.jpg|T5i front diagram
</gallery>

==T6i Diagrams==
<gallery>

</gallery>
[[File:Canon T6i Front Diagram.png|none|thumb|186x186px|T6i Front Diagram ]]
[[File:Canon Rebel T6i Back Diagram.png|none|thumb|177x177px|T6i Back Diagram]]
[[File:Canon T6i Mode Dial.png|none|thumb|178x178px]]

==Battery==
To insert a battery into the Canon Rebel:
# Open the battery door located on the bottom of the camera by pulling on the latch and swinging the door open.
# Align the battery attachment on the camera to the attachment in the slot.
# Slide the battery into place and lock it in.
# Close the battery door.
 

The battery will only fit in one way, so if it does not seem to be working, the battery is not oriented correctly. When the camera is powered off, it takes several seconds to clean the sensor. Because of this, make sure that the "Sensor Cleaning" logo is no longer on the screen before removing the battery. 
To charge the battery, slide it into the provided charger and then plug the charger into a standard 120 VAC outlet. '''Do not charge more than 24 hours. Do not use any charger other than the one provided with the camera.''' 

===Battery Life===
The Canon Rebel shows charge level in three stages: "Battery OK", "Battery Low", and "Needs to be Charged". To conserve battery life, the Rebel will go into a sleep mode after a period of disuse with default settings. To wake the camera, press the shutter button down halfway. If you know you will not be using the camera, it is best to fully turn the camera off.

==Camera Memory==
The T5i/T6i can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. Most Media Loan Rebels will come with a 16 gigabyte card already in the camera. If you wish to use your own card, make sure the speed rating is at least Class 4 for RAW photos, and Class 10 45mb/s for video. 
To switch memory cards, open the door on the back of the camera's hand grip, and press the back of the memory card. The card will pop out far enough to grab the back. Remove the card. To insert a new card, make sure it is oriented correctly, and insert the new memory card until it stops.

==Canon Rebel Lenses==
The Canon Rebel will accept any Canon EF of EF-S bayonet lenses. Media Loan has several different zoom and prime lenses that can be checked out alongside a Canon Rebel. Prime lenses (fixed focal length) are recommended for faster apertures and picture quality, while zoom lenses are recommended for changing shooting settings, or long telephoto applications.
===Removing and Replacing Lenses===
'''Please do not remove the included kit lens from the camera unless you intend to attach a different lens immediately.''' On the Canon Rebel, there is a half-circle shaped button on the right side of the lens mount (viewed from the front of the camera). To remove the lens, press this button, and turn the lens approximately 90 degrees clockwise. To attach a new lens, find the guide mark on the lens body. If it is an EF lens, the guide mark will be a red circle. If the lens is EF-S, the guide mark will be a white square. Line up the guide mark with the matching mark on the Canon rebel body, set the lens into the mount, and turn it approximately 90 degrees counter clockwise until it locks into place.
===Auto / Manual Focus Switch===
The Canon Rebel uses an in-lens focusing system, which is switched on and off on the body of the lens. Regardless of the settings on the camera body, if the switch on the lens is set to MF (Manual Focus), the camera will not perform AF (Auto Focus) functions.
===Image Stabilization===
Some canon lenses feature an optical IS (Image Stabilization) function. This can be useful for shooting fast-moving hand-held shots, shots in low-light environments, etc. Because the IS is optical, it will not deteriorate the quality of the image as digital image stabilization does. However, using the IS feature on a lens will drain the battery much faster. Due to power consumption concerns, we recommend that the IS be turned off when shooting from a tripod, or at high enough shutter speeds that hand movement will not be a concern. The IS controlled on the lens body, and if the lens has an IS feature, the switch will be next to the AF/MF switch next to the lens mount.

==Controls==
The T6i has two added buttons on top of the camera body, above the Mode Dial: DISP. and one for Auto-Focus (AF) functionality. The DISP. button will turn the LCD screen on/off when Live View is disengaged, and the AF allows for quick access to Auto-Focus settings.
===Mode Dial===
<gallery>

</gallery>
====A-DEP====
A-DEP (Automatic DEPth of Field) mode on the Canon Rebel is designed to maximize focus across a picture, and is primarily intended for landscapes or large groups of people. A-DEP must be used with AF turned on, as the camera will use the AF sensor array to search through the frame for the distance of all subjects, then determine aperture and shutter values to create a depth of field that will keep all subjects in focus. A-DEP is not recommended for moving subjects, portraits, or shots where foreground and background de-focus is desired. The only controllable exposure settings in A-DEP mode are ISO and Exposure compensation.

====M====
M (Manual) mode offers full control over all features on the Canon Rebel. All exposure settings and picture styles must be changed by the user. This allows for the most creative control over the camera, but also demands an understanding of the camera's features, and basic principals of photography. In manual mode, the shutter speed is controlled by the dial next to the shutter release button. Aperture is controlled by the same dial while the AV button on the back of the camera is pressed. ISO can be set by pressing the button on the top of the camera between the Mode Dial and the Shutter Speed Dial. While in M, you can choose Auto ISO.

====Av====
Av (Aperture Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed to let the user choose aperture values, and automatically determine shutter speed for correct exposure. While in Av mode, the dial next to the shutter button will control the aperture. ISO is controlled the same way as in M mode, and shutter speed is determined by the camera. Av mode is designed to let the user control depth of field in a shot (to customize deep of shallow focus), but may not be good for high speed subjects, as the camera may use a slow shutter speed to acquire correct exposure.

====Tv====
Tv (Shutter Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed for photography where shutter speed is crucial. In Tv mode, the shutter speed is controlled with the dial next to the shutter button. In this mode, the user determines shutter speed, and the camera will automatically determine an aperture value for correct exposure. ISO is controlled in the same manner as in M mode. Tv mode is designed for applications such as sports photography, where depth of field is not particularly important, but fast shutter speeds to minimize motion blur are desired.

====P====
P (Program Auto-Exposure) mode allows the camera to control both the shutter speed and the aperture value. Users may still set the ISO as in M mode. In P mode, the user may change the shutter / aperture combination by turning the dial next to the shutter button. When the user changes the shutter / aperture setting like this, the camera will automatically change both shutter speed and aperture value simultaneously to maintain correct exposure. This mode is good for shooting in rapidly changing environments, or learning how the combination of shutter and aperture change both exposure and visual elements within the picture.

====CA====
CA (Creative Auto) mode operates exactly like full automatic mode with several more user controlled options allowed. In CA mode, the user may turn the flash on or off, change exposure compensation, choose picture styles, and change the drive mode of the camera. All other values are locked to camera-control.

====Auto (Green Square)====
Auto mode locks all options into camera control. User cannot override any options on the camera, including exposure, picture style, or drive mode. Auto mode is not recommended for any shooting situation.

====Other Still Photo Modes====
The Canon Rebel has several specialized automatic modes, designed for various different applications. They mimic the manual control modes without giving the user any actual manual control of the camera. '''Flash Off''' mode runs like full auto, but locks out the flash. '''Portrait''' mode uses a wide aperture to defocus the background and emphasize the subject. '''Landscape''' mode uses a small aperture to create deep focus from the foreground to the background. '''Macro''' mode attempts to optimize exposure and shutter drive for close-up photography (NOTE: the close-focus distance of the rebel is determined by the lens, and will not change regardless of what mode the camera body is set to. To take photos with small subjects near the camera, check out a macro-specialized lens from Media Loan). '''Sports''' mode will use the fastest shutter speed possible to minimize motion blur in pictures. '''Night Portrait''' mode will fire the flash to get a clear photo of the foreground subject, and use a long shutter speed to capture the background. Although each of these modes has specific applications, manual camera modes will offer more control in any situation.

===Video Mode===
The T5i/T6i cameras have full-manual HD video functionality. Unlike other Rebel models at Media Loan, the video mode on the T5i/T6i is activated on the same switch '''near the Mode Dial as ON/OFF'''. This allows the user to easily change '''exposure modes with the mode dial''' while shooting video. 
Turn the switch to the video camera icon to engage video mode. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate '''(the Q menu is disabled in video mode)'''. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. You can change the exposure and image settings the same way in video mode as in photo mode (exterior buttons, touch screen). You can also adjust image settings in the '''MENU'''. Pressing '''INFO''' will display more or less information.
===Aperture / Exposure Compensation Button===
The '''Aperture / Exposure Compensation''' button (Av +/-) allows control over the aperture while in manual shooting mode. While in other modes, the button controls exposure compensation, allowing the user to make the camera expose lighter or darker than the internal meter would under normal operation.

===Quick Control Button (Q) / Q Menu===
The '''Quick Control (Q)''' button allows camera settings to be controlled via the cross keys when the '''Q Menu''' is engaged. To use the quick control feature, turn off Live View and press the Q button. You can then use the cross keys to select the setting you wish to change.

===Display Button===
'''T6i ONLY'''. The '''Display''' (DISP) button on the camera will turn the the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the '''Display''' button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.

===Info Button===
The '''INFO''' button on the camera will turn the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the INFO button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.
When Live View mode is engaged, the INFO button will display exposure settings on the LCD screen. Press the INFO button multiple times to display more or less settings.

===Depth-of-field Preview Button===
The aperture opening changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD screen, the depth of field will look narrow. Press the depth-of-field preview button (located on the camera body near the lens mount) to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the actual depth of field (range of acceptable focus). This will darken the viewfinder considerably. This button can also be used to display the exposure settings in the bottom of the viewfinder.

==Live View==
Both the T5i/T6i are capable of shooting in Live View mode. This will open up the mirror and the shutter in the camera body and display a live image from the camera's sensor on the screen. To turn live view on or off, press the button on the camera next to the eyepiece with the circular red Record logo and a small logo of the camera back. You can enable/disable Live View mode in the MENU.
While in Live View, auto focus will be severely limited. All video is shot in Live View mode. While the camera is in Live View, '''DO NOT''' point the camera at the sun, as the sensor is exposed and will be damaged. Note that the appearance of the image on the screen in live view mode does not reflect the brightness of the actual picture. Always use the meter or histogram, as the brightness of the LCD cannot be trusted.
While the camera is in video mode, live view mode will turn on automatically. In this case, the '''Live View''' button becomes the '''Record / Stop''' button for video recording.

==Metering Modes==
The Canon Rebels have built-in light meter systems. The metering modes measure the light of an image in order to determine whether or not it is properly exposed. The light meter is displayed in multiple places, including in the bottom of the viewfinder, in the Q Menu, and the bottom of the LCD screen in Live View mode. 
T5i/T6i both have four different modes to meter the lighting in a scene. 
* '''Evaluative Metering''' is the camera's standard metering mode. It is suited for most shooting situations, including some moderate back-lighting of a subject. 
* '''Partial Metering''' is effective when the background is significantly brighter or darker than the subject. 
* '''Center-Weighted Average Metering''' takes the average of lighting across the frame with slight preference given to lighting in the center of the frame. 
* '''Spot Metering''' meters from a small area in the center of the frame. Spot metering is the most accurate, but only accounts for a small part of the picture, so several meter readings may be necessary to evaluate the lighting of a scene.

==Shutter Drive Modes==
Shutter drive modes determine the way the camera will react when the shutter button is pressed. The T5i/T6i both have: 
* '''Single Shooting''' will take a picture each time the shutter button is fully depressed. 
* '''Continuous Shooting''' will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down. The camera will take pictures as fast as the shutter mechanism and the data buffer will allow. (max. aprox. 3 shots/second) 
* '''Self Timer / Remote Control''' will allow the shutter to be released via wired or wireless remote, or, if the shutter button is depressed, take a single shot after 2 or 10 seconds. 
The T6i has some additional drive features that the T5i doesn’t: 
* '''Single silent shooting''' is single shooting with less sound 
* '''Silent continuous shooting''' is continuous shooting with less sound 
* '''Self-timer: Continuous''' Press the up and down arrow keys to set the number of multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set number of multiple shots will be taken. 

==Image Size and Quality==
All Rebels have a number of image size and quality options. In most cases, the best option is to shoot at the highest resolution and quality possible, but space and processing limitations can make high-resolution images impractical.
===RAW Images===
Raw images are a direct feed from the camera's image sensor. Due to this, Raw files are extremely large and versatile. Raw image files have far better dynamic range than JPEG image files. Settings such as ISO and White balance can be changed during post processing, because Raw image files do not bake info into the image.

===JPEG Images===
JPEG images are compressed image files that save memory space by removing some of the detail and dynamic range from photographs. Canon Rebels apply a noise reduction process during the creation of JPEG images, which can make images look smoother in low-ISO situations, but can create a large amount of digital artifacts in high-ISO images. The T5i and T6i both have various resolution and quality settings for JPEG image capture.

=== Image-recording Quality Settings for the Canon Rebel T5i ===
[[File:Media Loan- Image Quality T5i.png|none|thumb|800x800px]]

==Menu System==
<gallery>
File:T2iMenu.jpg|T2i Menu Screen
File:T2iMenuNav.jpg|Menu Navigation Buttons
</gallery>
The full menu system of the Rebels can be accessed by pressing the '''MENU''' button on the back of the camera by the viewfinder. Image quality settings, picture style customization, memory management, screen brightness, and more are controlled from within the main menu. Use the cross keys to navigate the menu. Use the '''SET''' button to choose the highlighted option. At any time you can return to the main menu by pressing the '''MENU''' button again, or the home screen by halfway depressing the '''shutter release'''.

==Quick Exposure Settings Guide==
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the T5i/T6i. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder (enable with the depth-of-field preview button) and the LCD screen. The main ways to adjust exposure settings is with the top scroll wheel, the touch screen, set and cross keys, and the ISO and Av buttons. 
The exposure settings can be adjusted in multiple ways: 
* '''Exterior buttons:''' In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. To adjust the shutter speed, scroll back and forth with the top wheel. Aperture can be changed while holding down the Av button and scrolling with the top wheel. To adjust the ISO, press the ISO button (located on top of the camera near the mode dial) and then use the scroll wheel to make a selection. 
* '''Q Menu (Live View Off):''' Enable the Q menu by turning off Live View. You can then adjust exposure settings in manual shooting modes. Press the Q button to enable selections and set button to go into specific settings. You can use the touch screen instead of buttons, as well as the exterior buttons. 
* '''Live View:''' Enable the manipulation of the exposure settings in Live View by pressing the INFO button. Multiple depressions of INFO will enable various settings. Once engaged, you can use the touch screen or exterior buttons. 

== Custom White Balance ==
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.
 
'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.
[[File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png|none|thumb|100x100px]]
 
== Putting your Media onto a Computer ==
There are two ways to put photos and videos onto a computer from you camera. 
* '''SD card:''' Remove the SD card from your camera. Use a card reader from media loan to connect it to the computer via a USB mini to USB A cable. a folder should pop up automatically to the computer desktop, or be seen in the computer's file management system like Apples “Finder”. Remember to “eject” the folder before disconnecting the SD card.
* '''Direct connection:''' Connect your camera to the computer using a USB mini to USB A cable. the cable connects to a socket on your camera labeled “A/V out Digital” behind a rubber flap. Once connected turn on you camera and open a photo viewing software like Apples “Photos” desktop application. Within the application, your photos from the camera should be available as a folder. It should work similarly on the equivalent Windows photo application.
[[Category:Media_Loan]]

Canon Rebel T5i/T6i/T7i Gear Guide

2020-02-11T16:39:45Z

Williaas:

'''A proficiency test is required to check out this camera.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide, and complete the written portion of the [[Canon Rebel Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes. 
*[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/8/8b/Rebel_t5i_guide.pdf Canon Rebel T5i Complete Manual]

== Caring for the Canon Rebel==
Media Loan has a limited number of Canon Rebel cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''':
 
Drop this camera
 
Point camera toward Sun.
 
Submerge this camera in water
 
Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
 
Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car
 
Store this camera in excessive heat or cold
 
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
 
Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
 
Use excessive physical force 
Touch the mirror or sensor
 
Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

== New Features to the T5i/T6i==
The newer Rebel models have a separate video mode switch, a flip-out LCD monitor, touch screen functionality, and a depth-of-field preview button.

===LCD Flip-out Screen===
The T5i/T6i are the only cameras at Media Loan that have a flip-out LCD monitor. To flip the monitor out, pull on the right side of the screen. When it is swung out you can rotate it up, down, or over 180 degrees to face the subject. This allows you to view your Live View image or exposure settings from various angles.

===Touch Screen===
The LCD screen monitor on the T5i/T6i has touch screen capabilities, unlike the other Rebel models available at Media Loan. You can use the touch screen to navigate the MENU, adjust settings, and change exposure. It is automatically activated in Live View mode and the MENU; with Live View off you will need to press the Q button to activate the touch screen and navigate the Q Menu. Touch screen can be enabled/disabled in the MENU. The touch shutter function, activated in Live View mode, enables you to take a picture by simply tapping the LCD screen with your finger.

==T5i/T6i Differences==
The Canon Rebel T5i and T6i are very similar in design and functionality. They are both equipped with the same censor, the APS-C 332.3mm2 and have the same ISO range of 100-12,800. Media Loan has very few T6i’s available. Here are the major differences between these models: 
* Megapixels: 18MP – T5i vs. 24.2MP – T6i 
* Pixels: T5i – Bigger pixels, better in low-light vs. T6i – More pixels, higher resolution 
* Even though they have the same ISO range, the T6i handles noise better 
* The T6i has more Auto-Focus (AF) points 
They have slight differences in exterior buttons, explained below.

==T5i Diagrams==
<gallery>
File:T5i front.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i back.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i Dial.jpg|T5i front diagram
</gallery>

==T6i Diagrams==
<gallery>

</gallery>
[[File:Canon T6i Front Diagram.png|none|thumb|186x186px|T6i Front Diagram ]]
[[File:Canon Rebel T6i Back Diagram.png|none|thumb|177x177px|T6i Back Diagram]]
[[File:Canon T6i Mode Dial.png|none|thumb|178x178px]]

==Battery==
To insert a battery into the Canon Rebel:
# Open the battery door located on the bottom of the camera by pulling on the latch and swinging the door open.
# Align the battery attachment on the camera to the attachment in the slot.
# Slide the battery into place and lock it in.
# Close the battery door.
 

The battery will only fit in one way, so if it does not seem to be working, the battery is not oriented correctly. When the camera is powered off, it takes several seconds to clean the sensor. Because of this, make sure that the "Sensor Cleaning" logo is no longer on the screen before removing the battery. 
To charge the battery, slide it into the provided charger and then plug the charger into a standard 120 VAC outlet. '''Do not charge more than 24 hours. Do not use any charger other than the one provided with the camera.''' 

===Battery Life===
The Canon Rebel shows charge level in three stages: "Battery OK", "Battery Low", and "Needs to be Charged". To conserve battery life, the Rebel will go into a sleep mode after a period of disuse with default settings. To wake the camera, press the shutter button down halfway. If you know you will not be using the camera, it is best to fully turn the camera off.

==Camera Memory==
The T5i/T6i can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. Most Media Loan Rebels will come with a 16 gigabyte card already in the camera. If you wish to use your own card, make sure the speed rating is at least Class 4 for RAW photos, and Class 10 45mb/s for video. 
To switch memory cards, open the door on the back of the camera's hand grip, and press the back of the memory card. The card will pop out far enough to grab the back. Remove the card. To insert a new card, make sure it is oriented correctly, and insert the new memory card until it stops.

==Canon Rebel Lenses==
The Canon Rebel will accept any Canon EF of EF-S bayonet lenses. Media Loan has several different zoom and prime lenses that can be checked out alongside a Canon Rebel. Prime lenses (fixed focal length) are recommended for faster apertures and picture quality, while zoom lenses are recommended for changing shooting settings, or long telephoto applications.
===Removing and Replacing Lenses===
'''Please do not remove the included kit lens from the camera unless you intend to attach a different lens immediately.''' On the Canon Rebel, there is a half-circle shaped button on the right side of the lens mount (viewed from the front of the camera). To remove the lens, press this button, and turn the lens approximately 90 degrees clockwise. To attach a new lens, find the guide mark on the lens body. If it is an EF lens, the guide mark will be a red circle. If the lens is EF-S, the guide mark will be a white square. Line up the guide mark with the matching mark on the Canon rebel body, set the lens into the mount, and turn it approximately 90 degrees counter clockwise until it locks into place.
===Auto / Manual Focus Switch===
The Canon Rebel uses an in-lens focusing system, which is switched on and off on the body of the lens. Regardless of the settings on the camera body, if the switch on the lens is set to MF (Manual Focus), the camera will not perform AF (Auto Focus) functions.
===Image Stabilization===
Some canon lenses feature an optical IS (Image Stabilization) function. This can be useful for shooting fast-moving hand-held shots, shots in low-light environments, etc. Because the IS is optical, it will not deteriorate the quality of the image as digital image stabilization does. However, using the IS feature on a lens will drain the battery much faster. Due to power consumption concerns, we recommend that the IS be turned off when shooting from a tripod, or at high enough shutter speeds that hand movement will not be a concern. The IS controlled on the lens body, and if the lens has an IS feature, the switch will be next to the AF/MF switch next to the lens mount.

==Controls==
The T6i has two added buttons on top of the camera body, above the Mode Dial: DISP. and one for Auto-Focus (AF) functionality. The DISP. button will turn the LCD screen on/off when Live View is disengaged, and the AF allows for quick access to Auto-Focus settings.
===Mode Dial===
<gallery>

</gallery>
====A-DEP====
A-DEP (Automatic DEPth of Field) mode on the Canon Rebel is designed to maximize focus across a picture, and is primarily intended for landscapes or large groups of people. A-DEP must be used with AF turned on, as the camera will use the AF sensor array to search through the frame for the distance of all subjects, then determine aperture and shutter values to create a depth of field that will keep all subjects in focus. A-DEP is not recommended for moving subjects, portraits, or shots where foreground and background de-focus is desired. The only controllable exposure settings in A-DEP mode are ISO and Exposure compensation.

====M====
M (Manual) mode offers full control over all features on the Canon Rebel. All exposure settings and picture styles must be changed by the user. This allows for the most creative control over the camera, but also demands an understanding of the camera's features, and basic principals of photography. In manual mode, the shutter speed is controlled by the dial next to the shutter release button. Aperture is controlled by the same dial while the AV button on the back of the camera is pressed. ISO can be set by pressing the button on the top of the camera between the Mode Dial and the Shutter Speed Dial. While in M, you can choose Auto ISO.

====Av====
Av (Aperture Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed to let the user choose aperture values, and automatically determine shutter speed for correct exposure. While in Av mode, the dial next to the shutter button will control the aperture. ISO is controlled the same way as in M mode, and shutter speed is determined by the camera. Av mode is designed to let the user control depth of field in a shot (to customize deep of shallow focus), but may not be good for high speed subjects, as the camera may use a slow shutter speed to acquire correct exposure.

====Tv====
Tv (Shutter Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed for photography where shutter speed is crucial. In Tv mode, the shutter speed is controlled with the dial next to the shutter button. In this mode, the user determines shutter speed, and the camera will automatically determine an aperture value for correct exposure. ISO is controlled in the same manner as in M mode. Tv mode is designed for applications such as sports photography, where depth of field is not particularly important, but fast shutter speeds to minimize motion blur are desired.

====P====
P (Program Auto-Exposure) mode allows the camera to control both the shutter speed and the aperture value. Users may still set the ISO as in M mode. In P mode, the user may change the shutter / aperture combination by turning the dial next to the shutter button. When the user changes the shutter / aperture setting like this, the camera will automatically change both shutter speed and aperture value simultaneously to maintain correct exposure. This mode is good for shooting in rapidly changing environments, or learning how the combination of shutter and aperture change both exposure and visual elements within the picture.

====CA====
CA (Creative Auto) mode operates exactly like full automatic mode with several more user controlled options allowed. In CA mode, the user may turn the flash on or off, change exposure compensation, choose picture styles, and change the drive mode of the camera. All other values are locked to camera-control.

====Auto (Green Square)====
Auto mode locks all options into camera control. User cannot override any options on the camera, including exposure, picture style, or drive mode. Auto mode is not recommended for any shooting situation.

====Other Still Photo Modes====
The Canon Rebel has several specialized automatic modes, designed for various different applications. They mimic the manual control modes without giving the user any actual manual control of the camera. '''Flash Off''' mode runs like full auto, but locks out the flash. '''Portrait''' mode uses a wide aperture to defocus the background and emphasize the subject. '''Landscape''' mode uses a small aperture to create deep focus from the foreground to the background. '''Macro''' mode attempts to optimize exposure and shutter drive for close-up photography (NOTE: the close-focus distance of the rebel is determined by the lens, and will not change regardless of what mode the camera body is set to. To take photos with small subjects near the camera, check out a macro-specialized lens from Media Loan). '''Sports''' mode will use the fastest shutter speed possible to minimize motion blur in pictures. '''Night Portrait''' mode will fire the flash to get a clear photo of the foreground subject, and use a long shutter speed to capture the background. Although each of these modes has specific applications, manual camera modes will offer more control in any situation.

===Video Mode===
The T5i/T6i cameras have full-manual HD video functionality. Unlike other Rebel models at Media Loan, the video mode on the T5i/T6i is activated on the same switch '''near the Mode Dial as ON/OFF'''. This allows the user to easily change '''exposure modes with the mode dial''' while shooting video. 
Turn the switch to the video camera icon to engage video mode. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate '''(the Q menu is disabled in video mode)'''. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. You can change the exposure and image settings the same way in video mode as in photo mode (exterior buttons, touch screen). You can also adjust image settings in the '''MENU'''. Pressing '''INFO''' will display more or less information.
===Aperture / Exposure Compensation Button===
The '''Aperture / Exposure Compensation''' button (Av +/-) allows control over the aperture while in manual shooting mode. While in other modes, the button controls exposure compensation, allowing the user to make the camera expose lighter or darker than the internal meter would under normal operation.

===Quick Control Button (Q) / Q Menu===
The '''Quick Control (Q)''' button allows camera settings to be controlled via the cross keys when the '''Q Menu''' is engaged. To use the quick control feature, turn off Live View and press the Q button. You can then use the cross keys to select the setting you wish to change.

===Display Button===
'''T6i ONLY'''. The '''Display''' (DISP) button on the camera will turn the the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the '''Display''' button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.

===Info Button===
The '''INFO''' button on the camera will turn the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the INFO button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.
When Live View mode is engaged, the INFO button will display exposure settings on the LCD screen. Press the INFO button multiple times to display more or less settings.

===Depth-of-field Preview Button===
The aperture opening changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD screen, the depth of field will look narrow. Press the depth-of-field preview button (located on the camera body near the lens mount) to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the actual depth of field (range of acceptable focus). This will darken the viewfinder considerably. This button can also be used to display the exposure settings in the bottom of the viewfinder.

==Live View==
Both the T5i/T6i are capable of shooting in Live View mode. This will open up the mirror and the shutter in the camera body and display a live image from the camera's sensor on the screen. To turn live view on or off, press the button on the camera next to the eyepiece with the circular red Record logo and a small logo of the camera back. You can enable/disable Live View mode in the MENU.
While in Live View, auto focus will be severely limited. All video is shot in Live View mode. While the camera is in Live View, '''DO NOT''' point the camera at the sun, as the sensor is exposed and will be damaged. Note that the appearance of the image on the screen in live view mode does not reflect the brightness of the actual picture. Always use the meter or histogram, as the brightness of the LCD cannot be trusted.
While the camera is in video mode, live view mode will turn on automatically. In this case, the '''Live View''' button becomes the '''Record / Stop''' button for video recording.

==Metering Modes==
The Canon Rebels have built-in light meter systems. The metering modes measure the light of an image in order to determine whether or not it is properly exposed. The light meter is displayed in multiple places, including in the bottom of the viewfinder, in the Q Menu, and the bottom of the LCD screen in Live View mode. 
T5i/T6i both have four different modes to meter the lighting in a scene. 
* '''Evaluative Metering''' is the camera's standard metering mode. It is suited for most shooting situations, including some moderate back-lighting of a subject. 
* '''Partial Metering''' is effective when the background is significantly brighter or darker than the subject. 
* '''Center-Weighted Average Metering''' takes the average of lighting across the frame with slight preference given to lighting in the center of the frame. 
* '''Spot Metering''' meters from a small area in the center of the frame. Spot metering is the most accurate, but only accounts for a small part of the picture, so several meter readings may be necessary to evaluate the lighting of a scene.

==Shutter Drive Modes==
Shutter drive modes determine the way the camera will react when the shutter button is pressed. The T5i/T6i both have: 
* '''Single Shooting''' will take a picture each time the shutter button is fully depressed. 
* '''Continuous Shooting''' will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down. The camera will take pictures as fast as the shutter mechanism and the data buffer will allow. (max. aprox. 3 shots/second) 
* '''Self Timer / Remote Control''' will allow the shutter to be released via wired or wireless remote, or, if the shutter button is depressed, take a single shot after 2 or 10 seconds. 
The T6i has some additional drive features that the T5i doesn’t: 
* '''Single silent shooting''' is single shooting with less sound 
* '''Silent continuous shooting''' is continuous shooting with less sound 
* '''Self-timer: Continuous''' Press the up and down arrow keys to set the number of multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set number of multiple shots will be taken. 

==Image Size and Quality==
All Rebels have a number of image size and quality options. In most cases, the best option is to shoot at the highest resolution and quality possible, but space and processing limitations can make high-resolution images impractical.
===RAW Images===
Raw images are a direct feed from the camera's image sensor. Due to this, Raw files are extremely large and versatile. Raw image files have far better dynamic range than JPEG image files. Settings such as ISO and White balance can be changed during post processing, because Raw image files do not bake info into the image.

===JPEG Images===
JPEG images are compressed image files that save memory space by removing some of the detail and dynamic range from photographs. Canon Rebels apply a noise reduction process during the creation of JPEG images, which can make images look smoother in low-ISO situations, but can create a large amount of digital artifacts in high-ISO images. The T5i and T6i both have various resolution and quality settings for JPEG image capture.

=== Image-recording Quality Settings for the Canon Rebel T5i ===
[[File:Media Loan- Image Quality T5i.png|none|thumb|800x800px]]

==Menu System==
<gallery>
File:T2iMenu.jpg|T2i Menu Screen
File:T2iMenuNav.jpg|Menu Navigation Buttons
</gallery>
The full menu system of the Rebels can be accessed by pressing the '''MENU''' button on the back of the camera by the viewfinder. Image quality settings, picture style customization, memory management, screen brightness, and more are controlled from within the main menu. Use the cross keys to navigate the menu. Use the '''SET''' button to choose the highlighted option. At any time you can return to the main menu by pressing the '''MENU''' button again, or the home screen by halfway depressing the '''shutter release'''.

==Quick Exposure Settings Guide==
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the T5i/T6i. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder (enable with the depth-of-field preview button) and the LCD screen. The main ways to adjust exposure settings is with the top scroll wheel, the touch screen, set and cross keys, and the ISO and Av buttons. 
The exposure settings can be adjusted in multiple ways: 
* '''Exterior buttons:''' In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. To adjust the shutter speed, scroll back and forth with the top wheel. Aperture can be changed while holding down the Av button and scrolling with the top wheel. To adjust the ISO, press the ISO button (located on top of the camera near the mode dial) and then use the scroll wheel to make a selection. 
* '''Q Menu (Live View Off):''' Enable the Q menu by turning off Live View. You can then adjust exposure settings in manual shooting modes. Press the Q button to enable selections and set button to go into specific settings. You can use the touch screen instead of buttons, as well as the exterior buttons. 
* '''Live View:''' Enable the manipulation of the exposure settings in Live View by pressing the INFO button. Multiple depressions of INFO will enable various settings. Once engaged, you can use the touch screen or exterior buttons. 

=== Custom White Balance ===
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.
 
'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.
 
== Putting your Media onto a Computer ==
There are two ways to put photos and videos onto a computer from you camera. 
* '''SD card:''' Remove the SD card from your camera. Use a card reader from media loan to connect it to the computer via a USB mini to USB A cable. a folder should pop up automatically to the computer desktop, or be seen in the computer's file management system like Apples “Finder”. Remember to “eject” the folder before disconnecting the SD card.
* '''Direct connection:''' Connect your camera to the computer using a USB mini to USB A cable. the cable connects to a socket on your camera labeled “A/V out Digital” behind a rubber flap. Once connected turn on you camera and open a photo viewing software like Apples “Photos” desktop application. Within the application, your photos from the camera should be available as a folder. It should work similarly on the equivalent Windows photo application.
[[Category:Media_Loan]]

Canon Rebel T1i/T2i Operating Guide

2020-02-11T16:38:27Z

Williaas:

'''A proficiency test is required to check out this camera.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and [[Canon Rebel XT / XSi Operating Guide]] and complete the written portion of the [[Canon Rebel Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.
=== Caring for the Canon Rebel===
Media Loan has a limited number of Canon Rebel T1i/T2i cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''': Drop this camera Point camera toward Sun. Submerge this camera in water Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field! Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car Store this camera in excessive heat or cold Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals Use excessive physical force Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

===T1i / T2i Diagrams===
<gallery>
File:T2iBack.jpg|Camera Back
File:T2itop.jpg|Camera Top
File:T2iFront.jpg|Camera Front
</gallery>

===Battery===
To insert a battery into the Canon rebel, open the battery door found on the bottom of the camera by pulling on the latch and swinging the door open. The battery will slide into place and lock in. Close the battery door. The battery will only fit in one way, so if it does not seem to be working, the battery is not oriented correctly.

To charge the battery, slide it into the provided charger and then plug the charger into a standard 120 VAC outlet. '''DO NOT CHARGE MORE THAN 24 HRS'''. '''DO NOT USE ANY CHARGER OTHER THAN THE ONE PROVIDED WITH THE CAMERA'''.

When the camera is powered off, it takes several seconds to clean the sensor. Because of this, make sure that the "Sensor Cleaning" logo is no longer on the screen before removing the battery.
====Battery Life====
The Canon Rebel shows charge level in three stages: Battery OK, Battery Low, and Needs to be Charged. To conserve battery life, the Rebel will go into a sleep mode after a period of disuse. To wake the camera, press the shutter button down halfway. If you know you will not be using the camera, it is best to fully turn the camera off.

===Canon Rebel Lenses===
The Canon Rebel will accept any Canon EF of EF-S bayonet lenses. Media Loan has several different zoom and prime lenses that can be checked out alongside a Canon Rebel. Prime lenses (fixed focal length) are recommended for faster apertures and picture quality, while zoom lenses are recommended for changing shooting settings, or long telephoto applications.
====Removing and Replacing Lenses====
'''Please do not remove the included kit lens from the camera unless you intend to attach a different lens immediately.''' On the Canon Rebel, there is a half-circle shaped button on the right side of the lens mount (viewed from the front of the camera). To remove the lens, press this button, and turn the lens approximately 90 degrees clockwise. To attach a new lens, find the guide mark on the lens body. If it is an EF lens, the guide mark will be a red circle. If the lens is EF-S, the guide mark will be a white square. Line up the guide mark with the matching mark on the Canon rebel body, set the lens into the mount, and turn it approximately 90 degrees counter clockwise until it locks into place.
====Auto / Manual Focus Switch====
The Canon Rebel uses an in-lens focusing system, which is switched on and off on the body of the lens. Regardless of the settings on the camera body, if the switch on the lens is set to MF (Manual Focus), the camera will not perform AF (Auto Focus) functions.
====Image Stabilization====
Some canon lenses feature an optical IS (Image Stabilization) function. This can be useful for shooting fast-moving hand-held shots, shots in low-light environments, etc. Because the IS is optical, it will not deteriorate the quality of the image as digital image stabilization does. However, using the IS feature on a lens will drain the battery much faster. Due to power consumption concerns, we recommend that the IS be turned off when shooting from a tripod, or at high enough shutter speeds that hand movement will not be a concern. The IS controlled on the lens body, and if the lens has an IS feature, the switch will be next to the AF/MF switch next to the lens mount.

===Mode Dial===
<gallery>
File:T2iModes.jpg|
</gallery>
====A-DEP====
A-DEP (Automatic DEPth of Field) mode on the Canon Rebel is designed to maximize focus across a picture, and is primarily intended for landscapes or large groups of people. A-DEP must be used with AF turned on, as the camera will use the AF sensor array to search through the frame for the distance of all subjects, then determine aperture and shutter values to create a depth of field that will keep all subjects in focus. A-DEP is not recommended for moving subjects, portraits, or shots where foreground and background de-focus is desired. The only controllable exposure settings in A-DEP mode are ISO and Exposure compensation.
====M====
M (Manual) mode offers full control over all features on the Canon Rebel. All exposure settings and picture styles must be changed by the user. This allows for the most creative control over the camera, but also demands an understanding of the camera's features, and basic principals of photography. In manual mode, the shutter speed is controlled by the dial next to the shutter release button. Aperture is controlled by the same dial while the AV button on the back of the camera is pressed. ISO can be set by pressing the button on the top of the camera between the Mode Dial and the Shutter Speed Dial. While in M, you can choose Auto ISO.
====Av====
Av (Aperture Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed to let the user choose aperture values, and automatically determine shutter speed for correct exposure. While in Av mode, the dial next to the shutter button will control the aperture. ISO is controlled the same way as in M mode, and shutter speed is determined by the camera. Av mode is designed to let the user control depth of field in a shot (to customize deep of shallow focus), but may not be good for high speed subjects, as the camera may use a slow shutter speed to acquire correct exposure.
====Tv====
Tv (Shutter Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed for photography where shutter speed is crucial. In Tv mode, the shutter speed is controlled with the dial next to the shutter button. In this mode, the user determines shutter speed, and the camera will automatically determine an aperture value for correct exposure. ISO is controlled in the same manner as in M mode. Tv mode is designed for applications such as sports photography, where depth of field is not particularly important, but fast shutter speeds to minimize motion blur are desired.
====P====
P (Program Auto-Exposure) mode allows the camera to control both the shutter speed and the aperture value. Users may still set the ISO as in M mode. In P mode, the user may change the shutter / aperture combination by turning the dial next to the shutter button. When the user changes the shutter / aperture setting like this, the camera will automatically change both shutter speed and aperture value simultaneously to maintain correct exposure. This mode is good for shooting in rapidly changing environments, or learning how the combination of shutter and aperture change both exposure and visual elements within the picture.
====CA====
CA (Creative Auto) mode operates exactly like full automatic mode with several more user controlled options allowed. In CA mode, the user may turn the flash on or off, change exposure compensation, choose picture styles, and change the drive mode of the camera. All other values are locked to camera-control.
====Auto (Green Square)====
Auto mode locks all options into camera control. User cannot override any options on the camera, including exposure, picture style, or drive mode. Auto mode is not recommended for any shooting situation.
====Other Still Photo Modes====
The Canon Rebel has several specialized automatic modes, designed for various different applications. They mimic the manual control modes without giving the user any actual manual control of the camera. '''Flash Off''' mode runs like full auto, but locks out the flash. '''Portrait''' mode uses a wide aperture to defocus the background and emphasize the subject. '''Landscape''' mode uses a small aperture to create deep focus from the foreground to the background. '''Macro''' mode attempts to optimize exposure and shutter drive for close-up photography (NOTE: the close-focus distance of the rebel is determined by the lens, and will not change regardless of what mode the camera body is set to. To take photos with small subjects near the camera, check out a macro-specialized lens from Media Loan). '''Sports''' mode will use the fastest shutter speed possible to minimize motion blur in pictures. '''Night Portrait''' mode will fire the flash to get a clear photo of the foreground subject, and use a long shutter speed to capture the background. Although each of these modes has specific applications, manual camera modes will offer more control in any situation.

====Video====
Video mode in the Canon Rebel is a new an popular feature that will capture 1920x1080 video in 24p or 30p, or 1280x720 video in up to 60p. In the T1i, video can only go up to 1280x720, and exposure is limited to camera-controlled. The T2i has more advanced video features, and can record in 1920x1080, with full manual control over exposure settings. Both the T1i and the T2i allow for exposure compensation while in auto video mode, and when the T2i is set to manual exposure, it can be controlled using the same button / dial combination as M still photo mode.

===Camera Memory===
The T1i can use SD or SDHC memory cards. The T2i can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. Most Media Loan Rebels will come with a 16 gigabyte card already in the camera. If you wish to use your own card, make sure the speed rating is at least Class 4 for RAW photos, and Class 10 45mb/s for video.

To switch memory cards, open the door on the back of the camera's hand grip, and press the back of the memory card. The card will pop out far enough to grab the back. Remove the card. To insert a new card, make sure it is oriented correctly, and insert the new memory card until it stops.

===Metering Modes===
The Canon Rebel T1i and T2i both have four different modes to meter the lighting in a scene.
*'''Evaluative Metering''' is the camera's standard metering mode. It is suited for most shooting situations, including some moderate back-lighting of a subject.
*'''Partial Metering''' is effective when the background is significantly brighter or darker than the subject.
*'''Center-Weighted Average Metering''' takes the average of lighting across the frame with slight preference given to lighting in the center of the frame.
*'''Spot Metering''' meters from a small area in the center of the frame. Spot metering is the most accurate, but only accounts for a small part of the picture, so several meter readings may be necessary to evaluate the lighting of a scene.
===Shutter Drive Modes===
Shutter drive modes determine the way the camera will react when the shutter button is pressed.
*'''Single Shooting''' will take a picture each time the shutter button is fully depressed.
*'''Continuous Shooting''' will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down. The camera will take pictures as fast as the shutter mechanism and the data buffer will allow.'
*'''Self Timer / Remote Control''' will allow the shutter to be released via wired or wireless remote, or, if the shutter button is depressed, take a single shot after 10 seconds.
===Live View===
Both the T1i and T2i are capable of shooting in Live View mode. This will open up the mirror and the shutter in the camera body and display a live image from the camera's sensor on the screen. To turn live view on or off, press the button on the camera next to the eyepiece with the circular red Record logo and a small logo of the camera back. You can enable/disable Live View mode in the MENU.

While in Live View, auto focus will be severely limited. All video is shot in Live View mode. While the camera is in Live View, '''DO NOT''' point the camera at the sun, as the sensor is exposed and will be damaged. Note that the appearance of the image on the screen in live view mode does not reflect the brightness of the actual picture. Always use the meter or histogram, as the brightness of the LCD cannot be trusted.

While the camera is in video mode, live view mode will turn on automatically. In this case, the '''Live View''' button becomes the '''Record / Stop''' button for video recording.

===Aperture / Exposure Compensation Button===
The '''Aperture / Exposure Compensation''' button (Av +/-) allows control over the aperture while in manual shooting mode. While in other modes, the button controls exposure compensation, allowing the user to make the camera expose lighter or darker than the internal meter would under normal operation.

===Quick Control Button===
'''T2i ONLY''' - The '''Quick Control''' button allows camera settings to be controlled via the arrow keys. To use the quick control feature, press the '''Quick Control''' button and then use the arrow keys to select the setting you wish to change. For shutter speed and aperture value settings, the dial will change the value of the selection. For all other options, press '''Set''' to enter the sub-menu and choose the desired setting. The T1i does not have a quick control button, but this feature is always-on.

=== Custom White Balance ===
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.
 
'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.
 
===Display Button===
The '''Display''' (DISP) button on the camera will turn the the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the '''Display''' button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.

===Image Size and Quality===
All Rebels have a number of image size and quality options. In most cases, the best option is to shoot at the highest resolution and quality possible, but space and processing limitations can make high-resolution images impractical.
====RAW Images====
Raw images are a direct feed from the camera's image sensor. Due to this, Raw files are extremely large an versatile. Raw image files have far better dynamic range than JPEG image files. Settings such as ISO and White balance can be changed during post processing, because Raw image files do not bake info into the image.

====JPEG Images====
JPEG images are compressed image files that save memory space by removing some of the detail and dynamic range from photographs. Canon Rebels apply a noise reduction process during the creation of JPEG images, which can make images look smoother in low-ISO situations, but can create a large amount of digital artifacts in high-ISO images. The T1i and T2i both have various resolution and quality settings for JPEG image capture.

{| class="wikitable"
|+ Image Resolution and Quality Settings
! width="20%" |Image Quality Setting
! width="40%" |Image Resolution
! width="20%" |Image Type (File Extension)
! width="20%" |Approx Image Size (Megabytes)
|-
| Large Fine || 4752x3168 - T1i, 5184x3486 - T2i || .JPEG || 5.0 MB
|-
| Large Normal || 4752x3168 - T1i, 5184x3486 - T2i || .JPEG || 2.5 MB
|-
| Medium Fine || 3456x2304 - Both || .JPEG || 3.0 MB
|-
| Medium Normal || 3456x2304 - Both || .JPEG || 1.6 MB
|-
| Small Fine || 2353x1568 - T1i, 2592x1728 - T2i || .JPEG || 1.7 MB
|-
| Small Normal || 2353x1568 - T1i, 2592x1728 - T2i || .JPEG || 900 KB
|-
| RAW || 4752x3168 - T1i, 5184x3486 - T2i || .CR2 (Canon Raw) || 20.2 MB
|}

===Menu System===
<gallery>
File:T2iMenu.jpg|T2i Menu Screen
File:T2iMenuNav.jpg|Menu Navigation Buttons
</gallery>
The full menu system of the T2i can be accessed by pressing the '''Menu''' button on the back of the camera above the viewfinder. Image quality settings, picture style customization, memory management, screen brightness, and more are controlled from within the main menu. To navigate the menu system, use the horizontal arrow keys to move between tabs, and the vertical arrow keys to select options within the tabs. Use the '''Set''' button to choose the highlighted option. At any time you can return to the main menu by pressing the '''Menu''' button again, or the home screen by halfway depressing the '''Shutter Release'''.

===Video Mode===
Both the T1i and the T2i can record HD video. The T1i has limited frame rates and exposure options, while the T2i provides complete exposure control and more robust frame rate options.

====T1i Video====
To activate the T1i video mode, simply turn the mode dial to the far end with the movie camera icon. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. To choose resolution, enter the menu system, and look for the resolution setting option in the first tab.
*The T1i has no manual control over shutter or aperture while in video mode.
*While in 1920x1080 video resolution, the T1i can only record 20 frames per second, which will create jumpy motion in video. 1280x720 mode will record at 30 frames per second.

====T2i Video====
To activate the T2i video mode, simply turn the mode dial to the far end with the movie camera icon. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. To change the resolution and frame rate options, go to the first tab of the main menu (frame rates are listed next to the resolution). To switch between manual and automatic exposure controls, go to the '''Exposure''' option in the first tab of the main menu. While in manual exposure control, look at the bottom of the screen for light metering, shutter speed, f-stop and ISO. These options are controlled identically to '''Manual''' still photo mode.

[[Category:Media_Loan]]

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2020-02-11T16:35:58Z

Williaas:

[[File:6d_1.jpg|600x600px]]

=INTRODUCTION=
{{#ev:vimeo|159257397|500|right|APS Canon 6D Kit}}

{{#ev:vimeo|159256566|500|left|General Access Canon 6D Kit}} 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

'''[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]'''

'''Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test.]'''

The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.

Media Loan's other major DSLR is the Canon Rebel. Compared to the Rebel T5i, the 6D has:
* 30% better image quality
* Water sealing
* Longer battery life (2x more photos per battery charge)
* More light sensitivity - 2 f-stops
* 20% better resolution (20.9MP vs. 17.9)

...and more!

[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]

There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes. They include:
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens
* 1x remote kit
* 1x battery grip
* 1x battery charger
* 1x class 10 memory card
* 3x batteries

 
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are cine, manual, and prime, with an f/1.5. The kit includes:
* 1x shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.
* 1x 24mm lens
* 1x 35mm lens
* 1x 85mm lens
* 2x variable ND (neutral density) filters
* 3x batteries and a
* 1x plug in power supply
* 1x class 10 memory card
 
 
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits] 

Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.
 

=CARING FOR THE CANON 6D=
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]
<nowiki>*</nowiki>NEVER LEAVE THE CAMERA BODY ANYWHERE BUT IN THE KIT -- THE SCREEN AND OTHER SENSITIVE INSTRUMENTS CAN GET SCRATCHED OR RUINED!*

Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''': 
Drop this camera 
Point camera toward Sun 
Submerge this camera in water 
Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field! 
Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car 
Store this camera in excessive heat or cold 
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera 
Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals 
'''Mount an EF-S Lens onto the body''' 
Use excessive physical force 
Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

====EF-S Lenses:====
EF-S Mount lenses ''cannot'' be used with the 6D. The back of EF-S lenses extends too far back into the camera body and could damage the mirror or sensor. ONLY USE EF LENSES WITH THE 6D. All of the EF-S lenses at Media Loan are noted as such on their case, as well as on the lens itself. If you want to use any lenses other than the lens(es) that come with the kit, you need to check with the Media Loan staff.

=Quick Exposure Settings Guide=
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.'''
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q. This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off. Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed. To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.

=FRONT CONTROLS=
===Depth-of-Field Preview button===
[[File:depth_preview.png]]

This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)

===Lens Release Button===
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.

=TOP CONTROLS=

[[file:6d_2.jpg|400px|left|thumb|Canon 6D Top Controls]]
 
 
 
 
 
 

Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.
===Exposure Mode (Top left knob)===
Use this knob to set the exposure mode. Use M for full manual mode. The other settings will have some automatic features, depending on the mode you select.
===Top Main Dial===
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.

===AF Mode===
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.

You select between autofocus and manual focus with the switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.

===Drive===
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press the DRIVE button and move the top dial to change the drive mode. The settings are: 

[[file:6d_drive.png]]

===ISO (sensitivity to light)===
ISO sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. The higher the ISO, the more noise there will be in your image. Try to keep the ISO as low as possible. To adjust ISO, press ISO and turn the top dial.

===Metering===
Use the following chart to determine which metering mode you should use. Change the metering mode by pressing the meter button above the top LCD panel. 

[[file:6d_meter.png]]

===LCD Dial Light===
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.

=REAR CONTROLS=
[[File:6d_3.jpg|400px|left|thumb|Canon 6D Rear View]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

====MENU Button====
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings (see notes below).
====INFO Button====
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. Pressing INFO multiple times will display an electronic level.

====Diopter Control====
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.
====Photo/Video Lever====
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.

====Start/Stop (Live View)====
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power. This button is also used to start/stop video recording.

====AF-ON Button====
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.
====Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button====
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.
====AF-Area Mode Button====
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.
====Magnification Button====
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.
====Play Button====
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.
====The Quick Control [Q] Button====
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.
====Master Controls====
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.

====Delete Button====
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.

=MENU SETTINGS=
Access the MENU to change various camera system settings, such as video/photo resolution and formats. The MENU is organized into various tabs. You can access the video settings in the MENU when the camera is set to video mode, and the photography settings when the camera is set to photo mode. 

'''Notes on settings:'''
====Movie Rec. Size====
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. 

'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use.

====Format card====
Format the memory card before returning your camera to Media Loan. This not only clears it for the next user, but it also ensures protection of your work. Make sure to transfer the files off of the card before you format. Select “low level format” to completely clear the information (without low level format, your data will be retrievable by certain computer programs).

====Video system====
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.

=== Custom White Balance ===
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.
 
'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.
 
'''Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.'''
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.
[[File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png|none|thumb|100x100px]]
=REMOTE (GA Kit)=
The General Access kit comes with a remote, and there is multiple ways to use it. With this remote, 6D does not need to be in "remote" drive mode.

Steps for usage:
# Set the remote and receiver to the same channel. On each, remove the battery cover and flip the switch up to a matching channel (typically ch. 1). '''These must match'''.
# Plug the receiver into the corresponding input on the left side of the camera body.
# Power on the receiver and the camera.
# The shooting mode can be selected with the remote as well as the camera. The most direct way to use the remote is to set the camera to single shooting drive mode, and then use the remote to select your actual desired mode (single, continuous, BULB, and timer). The BULB function can be used two ways: two take quick, continuous shots (set the remote to bulb and the drive mode on the camera to continuous) and to take long exposures (set the remote to bulb and the exposure mode on the camera to BULB). In both uses, press the remote button one to start shooting and again to stop.
# If set to AF, hold the main button on the remote down halfway to focus. Press down all the way to take a picture in single shooting and timer modes. In burst mode, keep the button pressed to take multiple shots. In BULB, press the button once to open the shutter and a second time to close it.
# After a picture is take, you can hold the remote button halfway down again for a quick preview.

=SHOULDER RIG (APS Kit)=
The APS 6D kit can be checked out with a shoulder rig. This piece of equipment allows for stabilization of the camera. Please watch the APS Canon 6D Kit video at the top of this page to learn how to assemble this rig.

 

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Canon Rebel T5i/T6i/T7i Gear Guide

2020-02-11T16:33:18Z

Williaas:

'''A proficiency test is required to check out this camera.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide, and complete the written portion of the [[Canon Rebel Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes. 
*[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/8/8b/Rebel_t5i_guide.pdf Canon Rebel T5i Complete Manual]

== Caring for the Canon Rebel==
Media Loan has a limited number of Canon Rebel cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''':
 
Drop this camera
 
Point camera toward Sun.
 
Submerge this camera in water
 
Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
 
Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car
 
Store this camera in excessive heat or cold
 
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
 
Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
 
Use excessive physical force 
Touch the mirror or sensor
 
Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

== New Features to the T5i/T6i==
The newer Rebel models have a separate video mode switch, a flip-out LCD monitor, touch screen functionality, and a depth-of-field preview button.

===LCD Flip-out Screen===
The T5i/T6i are the only cameras at Media Loan that have a flip-out LCD monitor. To flip the monitor out, pull on the right side of the screen. When it is swung out you can rotate it up, down, or over 180 degrees to face the subject. This allows you to view your Live View image or exposure settings from various angles.

===Touch Screen===
The LCD screen monitor on the T5i/T6i has touch screen capabilities, unlike the other Rebel models available at Media Loan. You can use the touch screen to navigate the MENU, adjust settings, and change exposure. It is automatically activated in Live View mode and the MENU; with Live View off you will need to press the Q button to activate the touch screen and navigate the Q Menu. Touch screen can be enabled/disabled in the MENU. The touch shutter function, activated in Live View mode, enables you to take a picture by simply tapping the LCD screen with your finger.

==T5i/T6i Differences==
The Canon Rebel T5i and T6i are very similar in design and functionality. They are both equipped with the same censor, the APS-C 332.3mm2 and have the same ISO range of 100-12,800. Media Loan has very few T6i’s available. Here are the major differences between these models: 
* Megapixels: 18MP – T5i vs. 24.2MP – T6i 
* Pixels: T5i – Bigger pixels, better in low-light vs. T6i – More pixels, higher resolution 
* Even though they have the same ISO range, the T6i handles noise better 
* The T6i has more Auto-Focus (AF) points 
They have slight differences in exterior buttons, explained below.

==T5i Diagrams==
<gallery>
File:T5i front.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i back.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i Dial.jpg|T5i front diagram
</gallery>

==T6i Diagrams==
<gallery>

</gallery>
[[File:Canon T6i Front Diagram.png|none|thumb|186x186px|T6i Front Diagram ]]
[[File:Canon Rebel T6i Back Diagram.png|none|thumb|177x177px|T6i Back Diagram]]
[[File:Canon T6i Mode Dial.png|none|thumb|178x178px]]

==Battery==
To insert a battery into the Canon Rebel:
# Open the battery door located on the bottom of the camera by pulling on the latch and swinging the door open.
# Align the battery attachment on the camera to the attachment in the slot.
# Slide the battery into place and lock it in.
# Close the battery door.
 

The battery will only fit in one way, so if it does not seem to be working, the battery is not oriented correctly. When the camera is powered off, it takes several seconds to clean the sensor. Because of this, make sure that the "Sensor Cleaning" logo is no longer on the screen before removing the battery. 
To charge the battery, slide it into the provided charger and then plug the charger into a standard 120 VAC outlet. '''Do not charge more than 24 hours. Do not use any charger other than the one provided with the camera.''' 

===Battery Life===
The Canon Rebel shows charge level in three stages: "Battery OK", "Battery Low", and "Needs to be Charged". To conserve battery life, the Rebel will go into a sleep mode after a period of disuse with default settings. To wake the camera, press the shutter button down halfway. If you know you will not be using the camera, it is best to fully turn the camera off.

==Camera Memory==
The T5i/T6i can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. Most Media Loan Rebels will come with a 16 gigabyte card already in the camera. If you wish to use your own card, make sure the speed rating is at least Class 4 for RAW photos, and Class 10 45mb/s for video. 
To switch memory cards, open the door on the back of the camera's hand grip, and press the back of the memory card. The card will pop out far enough to grab the back. Remove the card. To insert a new card, make sure it is oriented correctly, and insert the new memory card until it stops.

==Canon Rebel Lenses==
The Canon Rebel will accept any Canon EF of EF-S bayonet lenses. Media Loan has several different zoom and prime lenses that can be checked out alongside a Canon Rebel. Prime lenses (fixed focal length) are recommended for faster apertures and picture quality, while zoom lenses are recommended for changing shooting settings, or long telephoto applications.
===Removing and Replacing Lenses===
'''Please do not remove the included kit lens from the camera unless you intend to attach a different lens immediately.''' On the Canon Rebel, there is a half-circle shaped button on the right side of the lens mount (viewed from the front of the camera). To remove the lens, press this button, and turn the lens approximately 90 degrees clockwise. To attach a new lens, find the guide mark on the lens body. If it is an EF lens, the guide mark will be a red circle. If the lens is EF-S, the guide mark will be a white square. Line up the guide mark with the matching mark on the Canon rebel body, set the lens into the mount, and turn it approximately 90 degrees counter clockwise until it locks into place.
===Auto / Manual Focus Switch===
The Canon Rebel uses an in-lens focusing system, which is switched on and off on the body of the lens. Regardless of the settings on the camera body, if the switch on the lens is set to MF (Manual Focus), the camera will not perform AF (Auto Focus) functions.
===Image Stabilization===
Some canon lenses feature an optical IS (Image Stabilization) function. This can be useful for shooting fast-moving hand-held shots, shots in low-light environments, etc. Because the IS is optical, it will not deteriorate the quality of the image as digital image stabilization does. However, using the IS feature on a lens will drain the battery much faster. Due to power consumption concerns, we recommend that the IS be turned off when shooting from a tripod, or at high enough shutter speeds that hand movement will not be a concern. The IS controlled on the lens body, and if the lens has an IS feature, the switch will be next to the AF/MF switch next to the lens mount.

==Controls==
The T6i has two added buttons on top of the camera body, above the Mode Dial: DISP. and one for Auto-Focus (AF) functionality. The DISP. button will turn the LCD screen on/off when Live View is disengaged, and the AF allows for quick access to Auto-Focus settings.
===Mode Dial===
<gallery>

</gallery>
====A-DEP====
A-DEP (Automatic DEPth of Field) mode on the Canon Rebel is designed to maximize focus across a picture, and is primarily intended for landscapes or large groups of people. A-DEP must be used with AF turned on, as the camera will use the AF sensor array to search through the frame for the distance of all subjects, then determine aperture and shutter values to create a depth of field that will keep all subjects in focus. A-DEP is not recommended for moving subjects, portraits, or shots where foreground and background de-focus is desired. The only controllable exposure settings in A-DEP mode are ISO and Exposure compensation.

====M====
M (Manual) mode offers full control over all features on the Canon Rebel. All exposure settings and picture styles must be changed by the user. This allows for the most creative control over the camera, but also demands an understanding of the camera's features, and basic principals of photography. In manual mode, the shutter speed is controlled by the dial next to the shutter release button. Aperture is controlled by the same dial while the AV button on the back of the camera is pressed. ISO can be set by pressing the button on the top of the camera between the Mode Dial and the Shutter Speed Dial. While in M, you can choose Auto ISO.

====Av====
Av (Aperture Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed to let the user choose aperture values, and automatically determine shutter speed for correct exposure. While in Av mode, the dial next to the shutter button will control the aperture. ISO is controlled the same way as in M mode, and shutter speed is determined by the camera. Av mode is designed to let the user control depth of field in a shot (to customize deep of shallow focus), but may not be good for high speed subjects, as the camera may use a slow shutter speed to acquire correct exposure.

====Tv====
Tv (Shutter Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed for photography where shutter speed is crucial. In Tv mode, the shutter speed is controlled with the dial next to the shutter button. In this mode, the user determines shutter speed, and the camera will automatically determine an aperture value for correct exposure. ISO is controlled in the same manner as in M mode. Tv mode is designed for applications such as sports photography, where depth of field is not particularly important, but fast shutter speeds to minimize motion blur are desired.

====P====
P (Program Auto-Exposure) mode allows the camera to control both the shutter speed and the aperture value. Users may still set the ISO as in M mode. In P mode, the user may change the shutter / aperture combination by turning the dial next to the shutter button. When the user changes the shutter / aperture setting like this, the camera will automatically change both shutter speed and aperture value simultaneously to maintain correct exposure. This mode is good for shooting in rapidly changing environments, or learning how the combination of shutter and aperture change both exposure and visual elements within the picture.

====CA====
CA (Creative Auto) mode operates exactly like full automatic mode with several more user controlled options allowed. In CA mode, the user may turn the flash on or off, change exposure compensation, choose picture styles, and change the drive mode of the camera. All other values are locked to camera-control.

====Auto (Green Square)====
Auto mode locks all options into camera control. User cannot override any options on the camera, including exposure, picture style, or drive mode. Auto mode is not recommended for any shooting situation.

====Other Still Photo Modes====
The Canon Rebel has several specialized automatic modes, designed for various different applications. They mimic the manual control modes without giving the user any actual manual control of the camera. '''Flash Off''' mode runs like full auto, but locks out the flash. '''Portrait''' mode uses a wide aperture to defocus the background and emphasize the subject. '''Landscape''' mode uses a small aperture to create deep focus from the foreground to the background. '''Macro''' mode attempts to optimize exposure and shutter drive for close-up photography (NOTE: the close-focus distance of the rebel is determined by the lens, and will not change regardless of what mode the camera body is set to. To take photos with small subjects near the camera, check out a macro-specialized lens from Media Loan). '''Sports''' mode will use the fastest shutter speed possible to minimize motion blur in pictures. '''Night Portrait''' mode will fire the flash to get a clear photo of the foreground subject, and use a long shutter speed to capture the background. Although each of these modes has specific applications, manual camera modes will offer more control in any situation.

===Video Mode===
The T5i/T6i cameras have full-manual HD video functionality. Unlike other Rebel models at Media Loan, the video mode on the T5i/T6i is activated on the same switch '''near the Mode Dial as ON/OFF'''. This allows the user to easily change '''exposure modes with the mode dial''' while shooting video. 
Turn the switch to the video camera icon to engage video mode. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate '''(the Q menu is disabled in video mode)'''. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. You can change the exposure and image settings the same way in video mode as in photo mode (exterior buttons, touch screen). You can also adjust image settings in the '''MENU'''. Pressing '''INFO''' will display more or less information.
===Aperture / Exposure Compensation Button===
The '''Aperture / Exposure Compensation''' button (Av +/-) allows control over the aperture while in manual shooting mode. While in other modes, the button controls exposure compensation, allowing the user to make the camera expose lighter or darker than the internal meter would under normal operation.

===Quick Control Button (Q) / Q Menu===
The '''Quick Control (Q)''' button allows camera settings to be controlled via the cross keys when the '''Q Menu''' is engaged. To use the quick control feature, turn off Live View and press the Q button. You can then use the cross keys to select the setting you wish to change.

===Display Button===
'''T6i ONLY'''. The '''Display''' (DISP) button on the camera will turn the the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the '''Display''' button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.

=== Custom White Balance ===
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.

'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.

'''Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.'''
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.
[[File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png|none|thumb|100x100px]]

===Info Button===
The '''INFO''' button on the camera will turn the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the INFO button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.
When Live View mode is engaged, the INFO button will display exposure settings on the LCD screen. Press the INFO button multiple times to display more or less settings.

===Depth-of-field Preview Button===
The aperture opening changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD screen, the depth of field will look narrow. Press the depth-of-field preview button (located on the camera body near the lens mount) to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the actual depth of field (range of acceptable focus). This will darken the viewfinder considerably. This button can also be used to display the exposure settings in the bottom of the viewfinder.

==Live View==
Both the T5i/T6i are capable of shooting in Live View mode. This will open up the mirror and the shutter in the camera body and display a live image from the camera's sensor on the screen. To turn live view on or off, press the button on the camera next to the eyepiece with the circular red Record logo and a small logo of the camera back. You can enable/disable Live View mode in the MENU.
While in Live View, auto focus will be severely limited. All video is shot in Live View mode. While the camera is in Live View, '''DO NOT''' point the camera at the sun, as the sensor is exposed and will be damaged. Note that the appearance of the image on the screen in live view mode does not reflect the brightness of the actual picture. Always use the meter or histogram, as the brightness of the LCD cannot be trusted.
While the camera is in video mode, live view mode will turn on automatically. In this case, the '''Live View''' button becomes the '''Record / Stop''' button for video recording.

==Metering Modes==
The Canon Rebels have built-in light meter systems. The metering modes measure the light of an image in order to determine whether or not it is properly exposed. The light meter is displayed in multiple places, including in the bottom of the viewfinder, in the Q Menu, and the bottom of the LCD screen in Live View mode. 
T5i/T6i both have four different modes to meter the lighting in a scene. 
* '''Evaluative Metering''' is the camera's standard metering mode. It is suited for most shooting situations, including some moderate back-lighting of a subject. 
* '''Partial Metering''' is effective when the background is significantly brighter or darker than the subject. 
* '''Center-Weighted Average Metering''' takes the average of lighting across the frame with slight preference given to lighting in the center of the frame. 
* '''Spot Metering''' meters from a small area in the center of the frame. Spot metering is the most accurate, but only accounts for a small part of the picture, so several meter readings may be necessary to evaluate the lighting of a scene.

==Shutter Drive Modes==
Shutter drive modes determine the way the camera will react when the shutter button is pressed. The T5i/T6i both have: 
* '''Single Shooting''' will take a picture each time the shutter button is fully depressed. 
* '''Continuous Shooting''' will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down. The camera will take pictures as fast as the shutter mechanism and the data buffer will allow. (max. aprox. 3 shots/second) 
* '''Self Timer / Remote Control''' will allow the shutter to be released via wired or wireless remote, or, if the shutter button is depressed, take a single shot after 2 or 10 seconds. 
The T6i has some additional drive features that the T5i doesn’t: 
* '''Single silent shooting''' is single shooting with less sound 
* '''Silent continuous shooting''' is continuous shooting with less sound 
* '''Self-timer: Continuous''' Press the up and down arrow keys to set the number of multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set number of multiple shots will be taken. 

==Image Size and Quality==
All Rebels have a number of image size and quality options. In most cases, the best option is to shoot at the highest resolution and quality possible, but space and processing limitations can make high-resolution images impractical.
===RAW Images===
Raw images are a direct feed from the camera's image sensor. Due to this, Raw files are extremely large and versatile. Raw image files have far better dynamic range than JPEG image files. Settings such as ISO and White balance can be changed during post processing, because Raw image files do not bake info into the image.

===JPEG Images===
JPEG images are compressed image files that save memory space by removing some of the detail and dynamic range from photographs. Canon Rebels apply a noise reduction process during the creation of JPEG images, which can make images look smoother in low-ISO situations, but can create a large amount of digital artifacts in high-ISO images. The T5i and T6i both have various resolution and quality settings for JPEG image capture.

=== Image-recording Quality Settings for the Canon Rebel T5i ===
[[File:Media Loan- Image Quality T5i.png|none|thumb|800x800px]]

==Menu System==
<gallery>
File:T2iMenu.jpg|T2i Menu Screen
File:T2iMenuNav.jpg|Menu Navigation Buttons
</gallery>
The full menu system of the Rebels can be accessed by pressing the '''MENU''' button on the back of the camera by the viewfinder. Image quality settings, picture style customization, memory management, screen brightness, and more are controlled from within the main menu. Use the cross keys to navigate the menu. Use the '''SET''' button to choose the highlighted option. At any time you can return to the main menu by pressing the '''MENU''' button again, or the home screen by halfway depressing the '''shutter release'''.

==Quick Exposure Settings Guide==
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the T5i/T6i. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder (enable with the depth-of-field preview button) and the LCD screen. The main ways to adjust exposure settings is with the top scroll wheel, the touch screen, set and cross keys, and the ISO and Av buttons. 
The exposure settings can be adjusted in multiple ways: 
* '''Exterior buttons:''' In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. To adjust the shutter speed, scroll back and forth with the top wheel. Aperture can be changed while holding down the Av button and scrolling with the top wheel. To adjust the ISO, press the ISO button (located on top of the camera near the mode dial) and then use the scroll wheel to make a selection. 
* '''Q Menu (Live View Off):''' Enable the Q menu by turning off Live View. You can then adjust exposure settings in manual shooting modes. Press the Q button to enable selections and set button to go into specific settings. You can use the touch screen instead of buttons, as well as the exterior buttons. 
* '''Live View:''' Enable the manipulation of the exposure settings in Live View by pressing the INFO button. Multiple depressions of INFO will enable various settings. Once engaged, you can use the touch screen or exterior buttons. 

== Putting your Media onto a Computer ==
There are two ways to put photos and videos onto a computer from you camera. 
* '''SD card:''' Remove the SD card from your camera. Use a card reader from media loan to connect it to the computer via a USB mini to USB A cable. a folder should pop up automatically to the computer desktop, or be seen in the computer's file management system like Apples “Finder”. Remember to “eject” the folder before disconnecting the SD card.
* '''Direct connection:''' Connect your camera to the computer using a USB mini to USB A cable. the cable connects to a socket on your camera labeled “A/V out Digital” behind a rubber flap. Once connected turn on you camera and open a photo viewing software like Apples “Photos” desktop application. Within the application, your photos from the camera should be available as a folder. It should work similarly on the equivalent Windows photo application.
[[Category:Media_Loan]]

File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png

2020-02-11T16:31:28Z

Williaas:

Canon Rebel T5i/T6i/T7i Gear Guide

2020-02-11T16:30:32Z

Williaas: /* Custom White Balance */

'''A proficiency test is required to check out this camera.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide, and complete the written portion of the [[Canon Rebel Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes. 
*[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/8/8b/Rebel_t5i_guide.pdf Canon Rebel T5i Complete Manual]

== Caring for the Canon Rebel==
Media Loan has a limited number of Canon Rebel cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''':
 
Drop this camera
 
Point camera toward Sun.
 
Submerge this camera in water
 
Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
 
Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car
 
Store this camera in excessive heat or cold
 
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
 
Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
 
Use excessive physical force 
Touch the mirror or sensor
 
Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

== New Features to the T5i/T6i==
The newer Rebel models have a separate video mode switch, a flip-out LCD monitor, touch screen functionality, and a depth-of-field preview button.

===LCD Flip-out Screen===
The T5i/T6i are the only cameras at Media Loan that have a flip-out LCD monitor. To flip the monitor out, pull on the right side of the screen. When it is swung out you can rotate it up, down, or over 180 degrees to face the subject. This allows you to view your Live View image or exposure settings from various angles.

===Touch Screen===
The LCD screen monitor on the T5i/T6i has touch screen capabilities, unlike the other Rebel models available at Media Loan. You can use the touch screen to navigate the MENU, adjust settings, and change exposure. It is automatically activated in Live View mode and the MENU; with Live View off you will need to press the Q button to activate the touch screen and navigate the Q Menu. Touch screen can be enabled/disabled in the MENU. The touch shutter function, activated in Live View mode, enables you to take a picture by simply tapping the LCD screen with your finger.

==T5i/T6i Differences==
The Canon Rebel T5i and T6i are very similar in design and functionality. They are both equipped with the same censor, the APS-C 332.3mm2 and have the same ISO range of 100-12,800. Media Loan has very few T6i’s available. Here are the major differences between these models: 
* Megapixels: 18MP – T5i vs. 24.2MP – T6i 
* Pixels: T5i – Bigger pixels, better in low-light vs. T6i – More pixels, higher resolution 
* Even though they have the same ISO range, the T6i handles noise better 
* The T6i has more Auto-Focus (AF) points 
They have slight differences in exterior buttons, explained below.

==T5i Diagrams==
<gallery>
File:T5i front.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i back.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i Dial.jpg|T5i front diagram
</gallery>

==T6i Diagrams==
<gallery>

</gallery>
[[File:Canon T6i Front Diagram.png|none|thumb|186x186px|T6i Front Diagram ]]
[[File:Canon Rebel T6i Back Diagram.png|none|thumb|177x177px|T6i Back Diagram]]
[[File:Canon T6i Mode Dial.png|none|thumb|178x178px]]

==Battery==
To insert a battery into the Canon Rebel:
# Open the battery door located on the bottom of the camera by pulling on the latch and swinging the door open.
# Align the battery attachment on the camera to the attachment in the slot.
# Slide the battery into place and lock it in.
# Close the battery door.
 

The battery will only fit in one way, so if it does not seem to be working, the battery is not oriented correctly. When the camera is powered off, it takes several seconds to clean the sensor. Because of this, make sure that the "Sensor Cleaning" logo is no longer on the screen before removing the battery. 
To charge the battery, slide it into the provided charger and then plug the charger into a standard 120 VAC outlet. '''Do not charge more than 24 hours. Do not use any charger other than the one provided with the camera.''' 

===Battery Life===
The Canon Rebel shows charge level in three stages: "Battery OK", "Battery Low", and "Needs to be Charged". To conserve battery life, the Rebel will go into a sleep mode after a period of disuse with default settings. To wake the camera, press the shutter button down halfway. If you know you will not be using the camera, it is best to fully turn the camera off.

==Camera Memory==
The T5i/T6i can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. Most Media Loan Rebels will come with a 16 gigabyte card already in the camera. If you wish to use your own card, make sure the speed rating is at least Class 4 for RAW photos, and Class 10 45mb/s for video. 
To switch memory cards, open the door on the back of the camera's hand grip, and press the back of the memory card. The card will pop out far enough to grab the back. Remove the card. To insert a new card, make sure it is oriented correctly, and insert the new memory card until it stops.

==Canon Rebel Lenses==
The Canon Rebel will accept any Canon EF of EF-S bayonet lenses. Media Loan has several different zoom and prime lenses that can be checked out alongside a Canon Rebel. Prime lenses (fixed focal length) are recommended for faster apertures and picture quality, while zoom lenses are recommended for changing shooting settings, or long telephoto applications.
===Removing and Replacing Lenses===
'''Please do not remove the included kit lens from the camera unless you intend to attach a different lens immediately.''' On the Canon Rebel, there is a half-circle shaped button on the right side of the lens mount (viewed from the front of the camera). To remove the lens, press this button, and turn the lens approximately 90 degrees clockwise. To attach a new lens, find the guide mark on the lens body. If it is an EF lens, the guide mark will be a red circle. If the lens is EF-S, the guide mark will be a white square. Line up the guide mark with the matching mark on the Canon rebel body, set the lens into the mount, and turn it approximately 90 degrees counter clockwise until it locks into place.
===Auto / Manual Focus Switch===
The Canon Rebel uses an in-lens focusing system, which is switched on and off on the body of the lens. Regardless of the settings on the camera body, if the switch on the lens is set to MF (Manual Focus), the camera will not perform AF (Auto Focus) functions.
===Image Stabilization===
Some canon lenses feature an optical IS (Image Stabilization) function. This can be useful for shooting fast-moving hand-held shots, shots in low-light environments, etc. Because the IS is optical, it will not deteriorate the quality of the image as digital image stabilization does. However, using the IS feature on a lens will drain the battery much faster. Due to power consumption concerns, we recommend that the IS be turned off when shooting from a tripod, or at high enough shutter speeds that hand movement will not be a concern. The IS controlled on the lens body, and if the lens has an IS feature, the switch will be next to the AF/MF switch next to the lens mount.

==Controls==
The T6i has two added buttons on top of the camera body, above the Mode Dial: DISP. and one for Auto-Focus (AF) functionality. The DISP. button will turn the LCD screen on/off when Live View is disengaged, and the AF allows for quick access to Auto-Focus settings.
===Mode Dial===
<gallery>

</gallery>
====A-DEP====
A-DEP (Automatic DEPth of Field) mode on the Canon Rebel is designed to maximize focus across a picture, and is primarily intended for landscapes or large groups of people. A-DEP must be used with AF turned on, as the camera will use the AF sensor array to search through the frame for the distance of all subjects, then determine aperture and shutter values to create a depth of field that will keep all subjects in focus. A-DEP is not recommended for moving subjects, portraits, or shots where foreground and background de-focus is desired. The only controllable exposure settings in A-DEP mode are ISO and Exposure compensation.

====M====
M (Manual) mode offers full control over all features on the Canon Rebel. All exposure settings and picture styles must be changed by the user. This allows for the most creative control over the camera, but also demands an understanding of the camera's features, and basic principals of photography. In manual mode, the shutter speed is controlled by the dial next to the shutter release button. Aperture is controlled by the same dial while the AV button on the back of the camera is pressed. ISO can be set by pressing the button on the top of the camera between the Mode Dial and the Shutter Speed Dial. While in M, you can choose Auto ISO.

====Av====
Av (Aperture Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed to let the user choose aperture values, and automatically determine shutter speed for correct exposure. While in Av mode, the dial next to the shutter button will control the aperture. ISO is controlled the same way as in M mode, and shutter speed is determined by the camera. Av mode is designed to let the user control depth of field in a shot (to customize deep of shallow focus), but may not be good for high speed subjects, as the camera may use a slow shutter speed to acquire correct exposure.

====Tv====
Tv (Shutter Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed for photography where shutter speed is crucial. In Tv mode, the shutter speed is controlled with the dial next to the shutter button. In this mode, the user determines shutter speed, and the camera will automatically determine an aperture value for correct exposure. ISO is controlled in the same manner as in M mode. Tv mode is designed for applications such as sports photography, where depth of field is not particularly important, but fast shutter speeds to minimize motion blur are desired.

====P====
P (Program Auto-Exposure) mode allows the camera to control both the shutter speed and the aperture value. Users may still set the ISO as in M mode. In P mode, the user may change the shutter / aperture combination by turning the dial next to the shutter button. When the user changes the shutter / aperture setting like this, the camera will automatically change both shutter speed and aperture value simultaneously to maintain correct exposure. This mode is good for shooting in rapidly changing environments, or learning how the combination of shutter and aperture change both exposure and visual elements within the picture.

====CA====
CA (Creative Auto) mode operates exactly like full automatic mode with several more user controlled options allowed. In CA mode, the user may turn the flash on or off, change exposure compensation, choose picture styles, and change the drive mode of the camera. All other values are locked to camera-control.

====Auto (Green Square)====
Auto mode locks all options into camera control. User cannot override any options on the camera, including exposure, picture style, or drive mode. Auto mode is not recommended for any shooting situation.

====Other Still Photo Modes====
The Canon Rebel has several specialized automatic modes, designed for various different applications. They mimic the manual control modes without giving the user any actual manual control of the camera. '''Flash Off''' mode runs like full auto, but locks out the flash. '''Portrait''' mode uses a wide aperture to defocus the background and emphasize the subject. '''Landscape''' mode uses a small aperture to create deep focus from the foreground to the background. '''Macro''' mode attempts to optimize exposure and shutter drive for close-up photography (NOTE: the close-focus distance of the rebel is determined by the lens, and will not change regardless of what mode the camera body is set to. To take photos with small subjects near the camera, check out a macro-specialized lens from Media Loan). '''Sports''' mode will use the fastest shutter speed possible to minimize motion blur in pictures. '''Night Portrait''' mode will fire the flash to get a clear photo of the foreground subject, and use a long shutter speed to capture the background. Although each of these modes has specific applications, manual camera modes will offer more control in any situation.

===Video Mode===
The T5i/T6i cameras have full-manual HD video functionality. Unlike other Rebel models at Media Loan, the video mode on the T5i/T6i is activated on the same switch '''near the Mode Dial as ON/OFF'''. This allows the user to easily change '''exposure modes with the mode dial''' while shooting video. 
Turn the switch to the video camera icon to engage video mode. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate '''(the Q menu is disabled in video mode)'''. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. You can change the exposure and image settings the same way in video mode as in photo mode (exterior buttons, touch screen). You can also adjust image settings in the '''MENU'''. Pressing '''INFO''' will display more or less information.
===Aperture / Exposure Compensation Button===
The '''Aperture / Exposure Compensation''' button (Av +/-) allows control over the aperture while in manual shooting mode. While in other modes, the button controls exposure compensation, allowing the user to make the camera expose lighter or darker than the internal meter would under normal operation.

===Quick Control Button (Q) / Q Menu===
The '''Quick Control (Q)''' button allows camera settings to be controlled via the cross keys when the '''Q Menu''' is engaged. To use the quick control feature, turn off Live View and press the Q button. You can then use the cross keys to select the setting you wish to change.

===Display Button===
'''T6i ONLY'''. The '''Display''' (DISP) button on the camera will turn the the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the '''Display''' button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.

=== Custom White Balance ===
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.

'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.

'''Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.'''
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.

===Info Button===
The '''INFO''' button on the camera will turn the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the INFO button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.
When Live View mode is engaged, the INFO button will display exposure settings on the LCD screen. Press the INFO button multiple times to display more or less settings.

===Depth-of-field Preview Button===
The aperture opening changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD screen, the depth of field will look narrow. Press the depth-of-field preview button (located on the camera body near the lens mount) to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the actual depth of field (range of acceptable focus). This will darken the viewfinder considerably. This button can also be used to display the exposure settings in the bottom of the viewfinder.

==Live View==
Both the T5i/T6i are capable of shooting in Live View mode. This will open up the mirror and the shutter in the camera body and display a live image from the camera's sensor on the screen. To turn live view on or off, press the button on the camera next to the eyepiece with the circular red Record logo and a small logo of the camera back. You can enable/disable Live View mode in the MENU.
While in Live View, auto focus will be severely limited. All video is shot in Live View mode. While the camera is in Live View, '''DO NOT''' point the camera at the sun, as the sensor is exposed and will be damaged. Note that the appearance of the image on the screen in live view mode does not reflect the brightness of the actual picture. Always use the meter or histogram, as the brightness of the LCD cannot be trusted.
While the camera is in video mode, live view mode will turn on automatically. In this case, the '''Live View''' button becomes the '''Record / Stop''' button for video recording.

==Metering Modes==
The Canon Rebels have built-in light meter systems. The metering modes measure the light of an image in order to determine whether or not it is properly exposed. The light meter is displayed in multiple places, including in the bottom of the viewfinder, in the Q Menu, and the bottom of the LCD screen in Live View mode. 
T5i/T6i both have four different modes to meter the lighting in a scene. 
* '''Evaluative Metering''' is the camera's standard metering mode. It is suited for most shooting situations, including some moderate back-lighting of a subject. 
* '''Partial Metering''' is effective when the background is significantly brighter or darker than the subject. 
* '''Center-Weighted Average Metering''' takes the average of lighting across the frame with slight preference given to lighting in the center of the frame. 
* '''Spot Metering''' meters from a small area in the center of the frame. Spot metering is the most accurate, but only accounts for a small part of the picture, so several meter readings may be necessary to evaluate the lighting of a scene.

==Shutter Drive Modes==
Shutter drive modes determine the way the camera will react when the shutter button is pressed. The T5i/T6i both have: 
* '''Single Shooting''' will take a picture each time the shutter button is fully depressed. 
* '''Continuous Shooting''' will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down. The camera will take pictures as fast as the shutter mechanism and the data buffer will allow. (max. aprox. 3 shots/second) 
* '''Self Timer / Remote Control''' will allow the shutter to be released via wired or wireless remote, or, if the shutter button is depressed, take a single shot after 2 or 10 seconds. 
The T6i has some additional drive features that the T5i doesn’t: 
* '''Single silent shooting''' is single shooting with less sound 
* '''Silent continuous shooting''' is continuous shooting with less sound 
* '''Self-timer: Continuous''' Press the up and down arrow keys to set the number of multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set number of multiple shots will be taken. 

==Image Size and Quality==
All Rebels have a number of image size and quality options. In most cases, the best option is to shoot at the highest resolution and quality possible, but space and processing limitations can make high-resolution images impractical.
===RAW Images===
Raw images are a direct feed from the camera's image sensor. Due to this, Raw files are extremely large and versatile. Raw image files have far better dynamic range than JPEG image files. Settings such as ISO and White balance can be changed during post processing, because Raw image files do not bake info into the image.

===JPEG Images===
JPEG images are compressed image files that save memory space by removing some of the detail and dynamic range from photographs. Canon Rebels apply a noise reduction process during the creation of JPEG images, which can make images look smoother in low-ISO situations, but can create a large amount of digital artifacts in high-ISO images. The T5i and T6i both have various resolution and quality settings for JPEG image capture.

=== Image-recording Quality Settings for the Canon Rebel T5i ===
[[File:Media Loan- Image Quality T5i.png|none|thumb|800x800px]]

==Menu System==
<gallery>
File:T2iMenu.jpg|T2i Menu Screen
File:T2iMenuNav.jpg|Menu Navigation Buttons
</gallery>
The full menu system of the Rebels can be accessed by pressing the '''MENU''' button on the back of the camera by the viewfinder. Image quality settings, picture style customization, memory management, screen brightness, and more are controlled from within the main menu. Use the cross keys to navigate the menu. Use the '''SET''' button to choose the highlighted option. At any time you can return to the main menu by pressing the '''MENU''' button again, or the home screen by halfway depressing the '''shutter release'''.

==Quick Exposure Settings Guide==
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the T5i/T6i. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder (enable with the depth-of-field preview button) and the LCD screen. The main ways to adjust exposure settings is with the top scroll wheel, the touch screen, set and cross keys, and the ISO and Av buttons. 
The exposure settings can be adjusted in multiple ways: 
* '''Exterior buttons:''' In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. To adjust the shutter speed, scroll back and forth with the top wheel. Aperture can be changed while holding down the Av button and scrolling with the top wheel. To adjust the ISO, press the ISO button (located on top of the camera near the mode dial) and then use the scroll wheel to make a selection. 
* '''Q Menu (Live View Off):''' Enable the Q menu by turning off Live View. You can then adjust exposure settings in manual shooting modes. Press the Q button to enable selections and set button to go into specific settings. You can use the touch screen instead of buttons, as well as the exterior buttons. 
* '''Live View:''' Enable the manipulation of the exposure settings in Live View by pressing the INFO button. Multiple depressions of INFO will enable various settings. Once engaged, you can use the touch screen or exterior buttons. 

== Putting your Media onto a Computer ==
There are two ways to put photos and videos onto a computer from you camera. 
* '''SD card:''' Remove the SD card from your camera. Use a card reader from media loan to connect it to the computer via a USB mini to USB A cable. a folder should pop up automatically to the computer desktop, or be seen in the computer's file management system like Apples “Finder”. Remember to “eject” the folder before disconnecting the SD card.
* '''Direct connection:''' Connect your camera to the computer using a USB mini to USB A cable. the cable connects to a socket on your camera labeled “A/V out Digital” behind a rubber flap. Once connected turn on you camera and open a photo viewing software like Apples “Photos” desktop application. Within the application, your photos from the camera should be available as a folder. It should work similarly on the equivalent Windows photo application.
[[Category:Media_Loan]]

Canon Rebel T5i/T6i/T7i Gear Guide

2020-02-11T16:29:17Z

Williaas: /* Custom White Balance */

'''A proficiency test is required to check out this camera.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide, and complete the written portion of the [[Canon Rebel Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes. 
*[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/8/8b/Rebel_t5i_guide.pdf Canon Rebel T5i Complete Manual]

== Caring for the Canon Rebel==
Media Loan has a limited number of Canon Rebel cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''':
 
Drop this camera
 
Point camera toward Sun.
 
Submerge this camera in water
 
Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
 
Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car
 
Store this camera in excessive heat or cold
 
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
 
Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
 
Use excessive physical force 
Touch the mirror or sensor
 
Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

== New Features to the T5i/T6i==
The newer Rebel models have a separate video mode switch, a flip-out LCD monitor, touch screen functionality, and a depth-of-field preview button.

===LCD Flip-out Screen===
The T5i/T6i are the only cameras at Media Loan that have a flip-out LCD monitor. To flip the monitor out, pull on the right side of the screen. When it is swung out you can rotate it up, down, or over 180 degrees to face the subject. This allows you to view your Live View image or exposure settings from various angles.

===Touch Screen===
The LCD screen monitor on the T5i/T6i has touch screen capabilities, unlike the other Rebel models available at Media Loan. You can use the touch screen to navigate the MENU, adjust settings, and change exposure. It is automatically activated in Live View mode and the MENU; with Live View off you will need to press the Q button to activate the touch screen and navigate the Q Menu. Touch screen can be enabled/disabled in the MENU. The touch shutter function, activated in Live View mode, enables you to take a picture by simply tapping the LCD screen with your finger.

==T5i/T6i Differences==
The Canon Rebel T5i and T6i are very similar in design and functionality. They are both equipped with the same censor, the APS-C 332.3mm2 and have the same ISO range of 100-12,800. Media Loan has very few T6i’s available. Here are the major differences between these models: 
* Megapixels: 18MP – T5i vs. 24.2MP – T6i 
* Pixels: T5i – Bigger pixels, better in low-light vs. T6i – More pixels, higher resolution 
* Even though they have the same ISO range, the T6i handles noise better 
* The T6i has more Auto-Focus (AF) points 
They have slight differences in exterior buttons, explained below.

==T5i Diagrams==
<gallery>
File:T5i front.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i back.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i Dial.jpg|T5i front diagram
</gallery>

==T6i Diagrams==
<gallery>

</gallery>
[[File:Canon T6i Front Diagram.png|none|thumb|186x186px|T6i Front Diagram ]]
[[File:Canon Rebel T6i Back Diagram.png|none|thumb|177x177px|T6i Back Diagram]]
[[File:Canon T6i Mode Dial.png|none|thumb|178x178px]]

==Battery==
To insert a battery into the Canon Rebel:
# Open the battery door located on the bottom of the camera by pulling on the latch and swinging the door open.
# Align the battery attachment on the camera to the attachment in the slot.
# Slide the battery into place and lock it in.
# Close the battery door.
 

The battery will only fit in one way, so if it does not seem to be working, the battery is not oriented correctly. When the camera is powered off, it takes several seconds to clean the sensor. Because of this, make sure that the "Sensor Cleaning" logo is no longer on the screen before removing the battery. 
To charge the battery, slide it into the provided charger and then plug the charger into a standard 120 VAC outlet. '''Do not charge more than 24 hours. Do not use any charger other than the one provided with the camera.''' 

===Battery Life===
The Canon Rebel shows charge level in three stages: "Battery OK", "Battery Low", and "Needs to be Charged". To conserve battery life, the Rebel will go into a sleep mode after a period of disuse with default settings. To wake the camera, press the shutter button down halfway. If you know you will not be using the camera, it is best to fully turn the camera off.

==Camera Memory==
The T5i/T6i can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. Most Media Loan Rebels will come with a 16 gigabyte card already in the camera. If you wish to use your own card, make sure the speed rating is at least Class 4 for RAW photos, and Class 10 45mb/s for video. 
To switch memory cards, open the door on the back of the camera's hand grip, and press the back of the memory card. The card will pop out far enough to grab the back. Remove the card. To insert a new card, make sure it is oriented correctly, and insert the new memory card until it stops.

==Canon Rebel Lenses==
The Canon Rebel will accept any Canon EF of EF-S bayonet lenses. Media Loan has several different zoom and prime lenses that can be checked out alongside a Canon Rebel. Prime lenses (fixed focal length) are recommended for faster apertures and picture quality, while zoom lenses are recommended for changing shooting settings, or long telephoto applications.
===Removing and Replacing Lenses===
'''Please do not remove the included kit lens from the camera unless you intend to attach a different lens immediately.''' On the Canon Rebel, there is a half-circle shaped button on the right side of the lens mount (viewed from the front of the camera). To remove the lens, press this button, and turn the lens approximately 90 degrees clockwise. To attach a new lens, find the guide mark on the lens body. If it is an EF lens, the guide mark will be a red circle. If the lens is EF-S, the guide mark will be a white square. Line up the guide mark with the matching mark on the Canon rebel body, set the lens into the mount, and turn it approximately 90 degrees counter clockwise until it locks into place.
===Auto / Manual Focus Switch===
The Canon Rebel uses an in-lens focusing system, which is switched on and off on the body of the lens. Regardless of the settings on the camera body, if the switch on the lens is set to MF (Manual Focus), the camera will not perform AF (Auto Focus) functions.
===Image Stabilization===
Some canon lenses feature an optical IS (Image Stabilization) function. This can be useful for shooting fast-moving hand-held shots, shots in low-light environments, etc. Because the IS is optical, it will not deteriorate the quality of the image as digital image stabilization does. However, using the IS feature on a lens will drain the battery much faster. Due to power consumption concerns, we recommend that the IS be turned off when shooting from a tripod, or at high enough shutter speeds that hand movement will not be a concern. The IS controlled on the lens body, and if the lens has an IS feature, the switch will be next to the AF/MF switch next to the lens mount.

==Controls==
The T6i has two added buttons on top of the camera body, above the Mode Dial: DISP. and one for Auto-Focus (AF) functionality. The DISP. button will turn the LCD screen on/off when Live View is disengaged, and the AF allows for quick access to Auto-Focus settings.
===Mode Dial===
<gallery>

</gallery>
====A-DEP====
A-DEP (Automatic DEPth of Field) mode on the Canon Rebel is designed to maximize focus across a picture, and is primarily intended for landscapes or large groups of people. A-DEP must be used with AF turned on, as the camera will use the AF sensor array to search through the frame for the distance of all subjects, then determine aperture and shutter values to create a depth of field that will keep all subjects in focus. A-DEP is not recommended for moving subjects, portraits, or shots where foreground and background de-focus is desired. The only controllable exposure settings in A-DEP mode are ISO and Exposure compensation.

====M====
M (Manual) mode offers full control over all features on the Canon Rebel. All exposure settings and picture styles must be changed by the user. This allows for the most creative control over the camera, but also demands an understanding of the camera's features, and basic principals of photography. In manual mode, the shutter speed is controlled by the dial next to the shutter release button. Aperture is controlled by the same dial while the AV button on the back of the camera is pressed. ISO can be set by pressing the button on the top of the camera between the Mode Dial and the Shutter Speed Dial. While in M, you can choose Auto ISO.

====Av====
Av (Aperture Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed to let the user choose aperture values, and automatically determine shutter speed for correct exposure. While in Av mode, the dial next to the shutter button will control the aperture. ISO is controlled the same way as in M mode, and shutter speed is determined by the camera. Av mode is designed to let the user control depth of field in a shot (to customize deep of shallow focus), but may not be good for high speed subjects, as the camera may use a slow shutter speed to acquire correct exposure.

====Tv====
Tv (Shutter Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed for photography where shutter speed is crucial. In Tv mode, the shutter speed is controlled with the dial next to the shutter button. In this mode, the user determines shutter speed, and the camera will automatically determine an aperture value for correct exposure. ISO is controlled in the same manner as in M mode. Tv mode is designed for applications such as sports photography, where depth of field is not particularly important, but fast shutter speeds to minimize motion blur are desired.

====P====
P (Program Auto-Exposure) mode allows the camera to control both the shutter speed and the aperture value. Users may still set the ISO as in M mode. In P mode, the user may change the shutter / aperture combination by turning the dial next to the shutter button. When the user changes the shutter / aperture setting like this, the camera will automatically change both shutter speed and aperture value simultaneously to maintain correct exposure. This mode is good for shooting in rapidly changing environments, or learning how the combination of shutter and aperture change both exposure and visual elements within the picture.

====CA====
CA (Creative Auto) mode operates exactly like full automatic mode with several more user controlled options allowed. In CA mode, the user may turn the flash on or off, change exposure compensation, choose picture styles, and change the drive mode of the camera. All other values are locked to camera-control.

====Auto (Green Square)====
Auto mode locks all options into camera control. User cannot override any options on the camera, including exposure, picture style, or drive mode. Auto mode is not recommended for any shooting situation.

====Other Still Photo Modes====
The Canon Rebel has several specialized automatic modes, designed for various different applications. They mimic the manual control modes without giving the user any actual manual control of the camera. '''Flash Off''' mode runs like full auto, but locks out the flash. '''Portrait''' mode uses a wide aperture to defocus the background and emphasize the subject. '''Landscape''' mode uses a small aperture to create deep focus from the foreground to the background. '''Macro''' mode attempts to optimize exposure and shutter drive for close-up photography (NOTE: the close-focus distance of the rebel is determined by the lens, and will not change regardless of what mode the camera body is set to. To take photos with small subjects near the camera, check out a macro-specialized lens from Media Loan). '''Sports''' mode will use the fastest shutter speed possible to minimize motion blur in pictures. '''Night Portrait''' mode will fire the flash to get a clear photo of the foreground subject, and use a long shutter speed to capture the background. Although each of these modes has specific applications, manual camera modes will offer more control in any situation.

===Video Mode===
The T5i/T6i cameras have full-manual HD video functionality. Unlike other Rebel models at Media Loan, the video mode on the T5i/T6i is activated on the same switch '''near the Mode Dial as ON/OFF'''. This allows the user to easily change '''exposure modes with the mode dial''' while shooting video. 
Turn the switch to the video camera icon to engage video mode. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate '''(the Q menu is disabled in video mode)'''. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. You can change the exposure and image settings the same way in video mode as in photo mode (exterior buttons, touch screen). You can also adjust image settings in the '''MENU'''. Pressing '''INFO''' will display more or less information.
===Aperture / Exposure Compensation Button===
The '''Aperture / Exposure Compensation''' button (Av +/-) allows control over the aperture while in manual shooting mode. While in other modes, the button controls exposure compensation, allowing the user to make the camera expose lighter or darker than the internal meter would under normal operation.

===Quick Control Button (Q) / Q Menu===
The '''Quick Control (Q)''' button allows camera settings to be controlled via the cross keys when the '''Q Menu''' is engaged. To use the quick control feature, turn off Live View and press the Q button. You can then use the cross keys to select the setting you wish to change.

===Display Button===
'''T6i ONLY'''. The '''Display''' (DISP) button on the camera will turn the the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the '''Display''' button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.

=== Custom White Balance ===
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.
# Photograph a white object.
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.
2. Select Custom White Balance in the menus.
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.
3. Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.

===Info Button===
The '''INFO''' button on the camera will turn the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the INFO button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.
When Live View mode is engaged, the INFO button will display exposure settings on the LCD screen. Press the INFO button multiple times to display more or less settings.

===Depth-of-field Preview Button===
The aperture opening changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD screen, the depth of field will look narrow. Press the depth-of-field preview button (located on the camera body near the lens mount) to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the actual depth of field (range of acceptable focus). This will darken the viewfinder considerably. This button can also be used to display the exposure settings in the bottom of the viewfinder.

==Live View==
Both the T5i/T6i are capable of shooting in Live View mode. This will open up the mirror and the shutter in the camera body and display a live image from the camera's sensor on the screen. To turn live view on or off, press the button on the camera next to the eyepiece with the circular red Record logo and a small logo of the camera back. You can enable/disable Live View mode in the MENU.
While in Live View, auto focus will be severely limited. All video is shot in Live View mode. While the camera is in Live View, '''DO NOT''' point the camera at the sun, as the sensor is exposed and will be damaged. Note that the appearance of the image on the screen in live view mode does not reflect the brightness of the actual picture. Always use the meter or histogram, as the brightness of the LCD cannot be trusted.
While the camera is in video mode, live view mode will turn on automatically. In this case, the '''Live View''' button becomes the '''Record / Stop''' button for video recording.

==Metering Modes==
The Canon Rebels have built-in light meter systems. The metering modes measure the light of an image in order to determine whether or not it is properly exposed. The light meter is displayed in multiple places, including in the bottom of the viewfinder, in the Q Menu, and the bottom of the LCD screen in Live View mode. 
T5i/T6i both have four different modes to meter the lighting in a scene. 
* '''Evaluative Metering''' is the camera's standard metering mode. It is suited for most shooting situations, including some moderate back-lighting of a subject. 
* '''Partial Metering''' is effective when the background is significantly brighter or darker than the subject. 
* '''Center-Weighted Average Metering''' takes the average of lighting across the frame with slight preference given to lighting in the center of the frame. 
* '''Spot Metering''' meters from a small area in the center of the frame. Spot metering is the most accurate, but only accounts for a small part of the picture, so several meter readings may be necessary to evaluate the lighting of a scene.

==Shutter Drive Modes==
Shutter drive modes determine the way the camera will react when the shutter button is pressed. The T5i/T6i both have: 
* '''Single Shooting''' will take a picture each time the shutter button is fully depressed. 
* '''Continuous Shooting''' will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down. The camera will take pictures as fast as the shutter mechanism and the data buffer will allow. (max. aprox. 3 shots/second) 
* '''Self Timer / Remote Control''' will allow the shutter to be released via wired or wireless remote, or, if the shutter button is depressed, take a single shot after 2 or 10 seconds. 
The T6i has some additional drive features that the T5i doesn’t: 
* '''Single silent shooting''' is single shooting with less sound 
* '''Silent continuous shooting''' is continuous shooting with less sound 
* '''Self-timer: Continuous''' Press the up and down arrow keys to set the number of multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set number of multiple shots will be taken. 

==Image Size and Quality==
All Rebels have a number of image size and quality options. In most cases, the best option is to shoot at the highest resolution and quality possible, but space and processing limitations can make high-resolution images impractical.
===RAW Images===
Raw images are a direct feed from the camera's image sensor. Due to this, Raw files are extremely large and versatile. Raw image files have far better dynamic range than JPEG image files. Settings such as ISO and White balance can be changed during post processing, because Raw image files do not bake info into the image.

===JPEG Images===
JPEG images are compressed image files that save memory space by removing some of the detail and dynamic range from photographs. Canon Rebels apply a noise reduction process during the creation of JPEG images, which can make images look smoother in low-ISO situations, but can create a large amount of digital artifacts in high-ISO images. The T5i and T6i both have various resolution and quality settings for JPEG image capture.

=== Image-recording Quality Settings for the Canon Rebel T5i ===
[[File:Media Loan- Image Quality T5i.png|none|thumb|800x800px]]

==Menu System==
<gallery>
File:T2iMenu.jpg|T2i Menu Screen
File:T2iMenuNav.jpg|Menu Navigation Buttons
</gallery>
The full menu system of the Rebels can be accessed by pressing the '''MENU''' button on the back of the camera by the viewfinder. Image quality settings, picture style customization, memory management, screen brightness, and more are controlled from within the main menu. Use the cross keys to navigate the menu. Use the '''SET''' button to choose the highlighted option. At any time you can return to the main menu by pressing the '''MENU''' button again, or the home screen by halfway depressing the '''shutter release'''.

==Quick Exposure Settings Guide==
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the T5i/T6i. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder (enable with the depth-of-field preview button) and the LCD screen. The main ways to adjust exposure settings is with the top scroll wheel, the touch screen, set and cross keys, and the ISO and Av buttons. 
The exposure settings can be adjusted in multiple ways: 
* '''Exterior buttons:''' In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. To adjust the shutter speed, scroll back and forth with the top wheel. Aperture can be changed while holding down the Av button and scrolling with the top wheel. To adjust the ISO, press the ISO button (located on top of the camera near the mode dial) and then use the scroll wheel to make a selection. 
* '''Q Menu (Live View Off):''' Enable the Q menu by turning off Live View. You can then adjust exposure settings in manual shooting modes. Press the Q button to enable selections and set button to go into specific settings. You can use the touch screen instead of buttons, as well as the exterior buttons. 
* '''Live View:''' Enable the manipulation of the exposure settings in Live View by pressing the INFO button. Multiple depressions of INFO will enable various settings. Once engaged, you can use the touch screen or exterior buttons. 

== Putting your Media onto a Computer ==
There are two ways to put photos and videos onto a computer from you camera. 
* '''SD card:''' Remove the SD card from your camera. Use a card reader from media loan to connect it to the computer via a USB mini to USB A cable. a folder should pop up automatically to the computer desktop, or be seen in the computer's file management system like Apples “Finder”. Remember to “eject” the folder before disconnecting the SD card.
* '''Direct connection:''' Connect your camera to the computer using a USB mini to USB A cable. the cable connects to a socket on your camera labeled “A/V out Digital” behind a rubber flap. Once connected turn on you camera and open a photo viewing software like Apples “Photos” desktop application. Within the application, your photos from the camera should be available as a folder. It should work similarly on the equivalent Windows photo application.
[[Category:Media_Loan]]

Canon Rebel T5i/T6i/T7i Gear Guide

2020-02-11T02:10:24Z

Williaas:

'''A proficiency test is required to check out this camera.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide, and complete the written portion of the [[Canon Rebel Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes. 
*[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/8/8b/Rebel_t5i_guide.pdf Canon Rebel T5i Complete Manual]

== Caring for the Canon Rebel==
Media Loan has a limited number of Canon Rebel cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''':
 
Drop this camera
 
Point camera toward Sun.
 
Submerge this camera in water
 
Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
 
Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car
 
Store this camera in excessive heat or cold
 
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
 
Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
 
Use excessive physical force 
Touch the mirror or sensor
 
Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

== New Features to the T5i/T6i==
The newer Rebel models have a separate video mode switch, a flip-out LCD monitor, touch screen functionality, and a depth-of-field preview button.

===LCD Flip-out Screen===
The T5i/T6i are the only cameras at Media Loan that have a flip-out LCD monitor. To flip the monitor out, pull on the right side of the screen. When it is swung out you can rotate it up, down, or over 180 degrees to face the subject. This allows you to view your Live View image or exposure settings from various angles.

===Touch Screen===
The LCD screen monitor on the T5i/T6i has touch screen capabilities, unlike the other Rebel models available at Media Loan. You can use the touch screen to navigate the MENU, adjust settings, and change exposure. It is automatically activated in Live View mode and the MENU; with Live View off you will need to press the Q button to activate the touch screen and navigate the Q Menu. Touch screen can be enabled/disabled in the MENU. The touch shutter function, activated in Live View mode, enables you to take a picture by simply tapping the LCD screen with your finger.

==T5i/T6i Differences==
The Canon Rebel T5i and T6i are very similar in design and functionality. They are both equipped with the same censor, the APS-C 332.3mm2 and have the same ISO range of 100-12,800. Media Loan has very few T6i’s available. Here are the major differences between these models: 
* Megapixels: 18MP – T5i vs. 24.2MP – T6i 
* Pixels: T5i – Bigger pixels, better in low-light vs. T6i – More pixels, higher resolution 
* Even though they have the same ISO range, the T6i handles noise better 
* The T6i has more Auto-Focus (AF) points 
They have slight differences in exterior buttons, explained below.

==T5i Diagrams==
<gallery>
File:T5i front.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i back.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i Dial.jpg|T5i front diagram
</gallery>

==T6i Diagrams==
<gallery>

</gallery>
[[File:Canon T6i Front Diagram.png|none|thumb|186x186px|T6i Front Diagram ]]
[[File:Canon Rebel T6i Back Diagram.png|none|thumb|177x177px|T6i Back Diagram]]
[[File:Canon T6i Mode Dial.png|none|thumb|178x178px]]

==Battery==
To insert a battery into the Canon Rebel:
# Open the battery door located on the bottom of the camera by pulling on the latch and swinging the door open.
# Align the battery attachment on the camera to the attachment in the slot.
# Slide the battery into place and lock it in.
# Close the battery door.
 

The battery will only fit in one way, so if it does not seem to be working, the battery is not oriented correctly. When the camera is powered off, it takes several seconds to clean the sensor. Because of this, make sure that the "Sensor Cleaning" logo is no longer on the screen before removing the battery. 
To charge the battery, slide it into the provided charger and then plug the charger into a standard 120 VAC outlet. '''Do not charge more than 24 hours. Do not use any charger other than the one provided with the camera.''' 

===Battery Life===
The Canon Rebel shows charge level in three stages: "Battery OK", "Battery Low", and "Needs to be Charged". To conserve battery life, the Rebel will go into a sleep mode after a period of disuse with default settings. To wake the camera, press the shutter button down halfway. If you know you will not be using the camera, it is best to fully turn the camera off.

==Camera Memory==
The T5i/T6i can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. Most Media Loan Rebels will come with a 16 gigabyte card already in the camera. If you wish to use your own card, make sure the speed rating is at least Class 4 for RAW photos, and Class 10 45mb/s for video. 
To switch memory cards, open the door on the back of the camera's hand grip, and press the back of the memory card. The card will pop out far enough to grab the back. Remove the card. To insert a new card, make sure it is oriented correctly, and insert the new memory card until it stops.

==Canon Rebel Lenses==
The Canon Rebel will accept any Canon EF of EF-S bayonet lenses. Media Loan has several different zoom and prime lenses that can be checked out alongside a Canon Rebel. Prime lenses (fixed focal length) are recommended for faster apertures and picture quality, while zoom lenses are recommended for changing shooting settings, or long telephoto applications.
===Removing and Replacing Lenses===
'''Please do not remove the included kit lens from the camera unless you intend to attach a different lens immediately.''' On the Canon Rebel, there is a half-circle shaped button on the right side of the lens mount (viewed from the front of the camera). To remove the lens, press this button, and turn the lens approximately 90 degrees clockwise. To attach a new lens, find the guide mark on the lens body. If it is an EF lens, the guide mark will be a red circle. If the lens is EF-S, the guide mark will be a white square. Line up the guide mark with the matching mark on the Canon rebel body, set the lens into the mount, and turn it approximately 90 degrees counter clockwise until it locks into place.
===Auto / Manual Focus Switch===
The Canon Rebel uses an in-lens focusing system, which is switched on and off on the body of the lens. Regardless of the settings on the camera body, if the switch on the lens is set to MF (Manual Focus), the camera will not perform AF (Auto Focus) functions.
===Image Stabilization===
Some canon lenses feature an optical IS (Image Stabilization) function. This can be useful for shooting fast-moving hand-held shots, shots in low-light environments, etc. Because the IS is optical, it will not deteriorate the quality of the image as digital image stabilization does. However, using the IS feature on a lens will drain the battery much faster. Due to power consumption concerns, we recommend that the IS be turned off when shooting from a tripod, or at high enough shutter speeds that hand movement will not be a concern. The IS controlled on the lens body, and if the lens has an IS feature, the switch will be next to the AF/MF switch next to the lens mount.

==Controls==
The T6i has two added buttons on top of the camera body, above the Mode Dial: DISP. and one for Auto-Focus (AF) functionality. The DISP. button will turn the LCD screen on/off when Live View is disengaged, and the AF allows for quick access to Auto-Focus settings.
===Mode Dial===
<gallery>

</gallery>
====A-DEP====
A-DEP (Automatic DEPth of Field) mode on the Canon Rebel is designed to maximize focus across a picture, and is primarily intended for landscapes or large groups of people. A-DEP must be used with AF turned on, as the camera will use the AF sensor array to search through the frame for the distance of all subjects, then determine aperture and shutter values to create a depth of field that will keep all subjects in focus. A-DEP is not recommended for moving subjects, portraits, or shots where foreground and background de-focus is desired. The only controllable exposure settings in A-DEP mode are ISO and Exposure compensation.

====M====
M (Manual) mode offers full control over all features on the Canon Rebel. All exposure settings and picture styles must be changed by the user. This allows for the most creative control over the camera, but also demands an understanding of the camera's features, and basic principals of photography. In manual mode, the shutter speed is controlled by the dial next to the shutter release button. Aperture is controlled by the same dial while the AV button on the back of the camera is pressed. ISO can be set by pressing the button on the top of the camera between the Mode Dial and the Shutter Speed Dial. While in M, you can choose Auto ISO.

====Av====
Av (Aperture Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed to let the user choose aperture values, and automatically determine shutter speed for correct exposure. While in Av mode, the dial next to the shutter button will control the aperture. ISO is controlled the same way as in M mode, and shutter speed is determined by the camera. Av mode is designed to let the user control depth of field in a shot (to customize deep of shallow focus), but may not be good for high speed subjects, as the camera may use a slow shutter speed to acquire correct exposure.

====Tv====
Tv (Shutter Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed for photography where shutter speed is crucial. In Tv mode, the shutter speed is controlled with the dial next to the shutter button. In this mode, the user determines shutter speed, and the camera will automatically determine an aperture value for correct exposure. ISO is controlled in the same manner as in M mode. Tv mode is designed for applications such as sports photography, where depth of field is not particularly important, but fast shutter speeds to minimize motion blur are desired.

====P====
P (Program Auto-Exposure) mode allows the camera to control both the shutter speed and the aperture value. Users may still set the ISO as in M mode. In P mode, the user may change the shutter / aperture combination by turning the dial next to the shutter button. When the user changes the shutter / aperture setting like this, the camera will automatically change both shutter speed and aperture value simultaneously to maintain correct exposure. This mode is good for shooting in rapidly changing environments, or learning how the combination of shutter and aperture change both exposure and visual elements within the picture.

====CA====
CA (Creative Auto) mode operates exactly like full automatic mode with several more user controlled options allowed. In CA mode, the user may turn the flash on or off, change exposure compensation, choose picture styles, and change the drive mode of the camera. All other values are locked to camera-control.

====Auto (Green Square)====
Auto mode locks all options into camera control. User cannot override any options on the camera, including exposure, picture style, or drive mode. Auto mode is not recommended for any shooting situation.

====Other Still Photo Modes====
The Canon Rebel has several specialized automatic modes, designed for various different applications. They mimic the manual control modes without giving the user any actual manual control of the camera. '''Flash Off''' mode runs like full auto, but locks out the flash. '''Portrait''' mode uses a wide aperture to defocus the background and emphasize the subject. '''Landscape''' mode uses a small aperture to create deep focus from the foreground to the background. '''Macro''' mode attempts to optimize exposure and shutter drive for close-up photography (NOTE: the close-focus distance of the rebel is determined by the lens, and will not change regardless of what mode the camera body is set to. To take photos with small subjects near the camera, check out a macro-specialized lens from Media Loan). '''Sports''' mode will use the fastest shutter speed possible to minimize motion blur in pictures. '''Night Portrait''' mode will fire the flash to get a clear photo of the foreground subject, and use a long shutter speed to capture the background. Although each of these modes has specific applications, manual camera modes will offer more control in any situation.

===Video Mode===
The T5i/T6i cameras have full-manual HD video functionality. Unlike other Rebel models at Media Loan, the video mode on the T5i/T6i is activated on the same switch '''near the Mode Dial as ON/OFF'''. This allows the user to easily change '''exposure modes with the mode dial''' while shooting video. 
Turn the switch to the video camera icon to engage video mode. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate '''(the Q menu is disabled in video mode)'''. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. You can change the exposure and image settings the same way in video mode as in photo mode (exterior buttons, touch screen). You can also adjust image settings in the '''MENU'''. Pressing '''INFO''' will display more or less information.
===Aperture / Exposure Compensation Button===
The '''Aperture / Exposure Compensation''' button (Av +/-) allows control over the aperture while in manual shooting mode. While in other modes, the button controls exposure compensation, allowing the user to make the camera expose lighter or darker than the internal meter would under normal operation.

===Quick Control Button (Q) / Q Menu===
The '''Quick Control (Q)''' button allows camera settings to be controlled via the cross keys when the '''Q Menu''' is engaged. To use the quick control feature, turn off Live View and press the Q button. You can then use the cross keys to select the setting you wish to change.

===Display Button===
'''T6i ONLY'''. The '''Display''' (DISP) button on the camera will turn the the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the '''Display''' button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.

=== Custom White Balance ===

===Info Button===
The '''INFO''' button on the camera will turn the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the INFO button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.
When Live View mode is engaged, the INFO button will display exposure settings on the LCD screen. Press the INFO button multiple times to display more or less settings.

===Depth-of-field Preview Button===
The aperture opening changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD screen, the depth of field will look narrow. Press the depth-of-field preview button (located on the camera body near the lens mount) to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the actual depth of field (range of acceptable focus). This will darken the viewfinder considerably. This button can also be used to display the exposure settings in the bottom of the viewfinder.

==Live View==
Both the T5i/T6i are capable of shooting in Live View mode. This will open up the mirror and the shutter in the camera body and display a live image from the camera's sensor on the screen. To turn live view on or off, press the button on the camera next to the eyepiece with the circular red Record logo and a small logo of the camera back. You can enable/disable Live View mode in the MENU.
While in Live View, auto focus will be severely limited. All video is shot in Live View mode. While the camera is in Live View, '''DO NOT''' point the camera at the sun, as the sensor is exposed and will be damaged. Note that the appearance of the image on the screen in live view mode does not reflect the brightness of the actual picture. Always use the meter or histogram, as the brightness of the LCD cannot be trusted.
While the camera is in video mode, live view mode will turn on automatically. In this case, the '''Live View''' button becomes the '''Record / Stop''' button for video recording.

==Metering Modes==
The Canon Rebels have built-in light meter systems. The metering modes measure the light of an image in order to determine whether or not it is properly exposed. The light meter is displayed in multiple places, including in the bottom of the viewfinder, in the Q Menu, and the bottom of the LCD screen in Live View mode. 
T5i/T6i both have four different modes to meter the lighting in a scene. 
* '''Evaluative Metering''' is the camera's standard metering mode. It is suited for most shooting situations, including some moderate back-lighting of a subject. 
* '''Partial Metering''' is effective when the background is significantly brighter or darker than the subject. 
* '''Center-Weighted Average Metering''' takes the average of lighting across the frame with slight preference given to lighting in the center of the frame. 
* '''Spot Metering''' meters from a small area in the center of the frame. Spot metering is the most accurate, but only accounts for a small part of the picture, so several meter readings may be necessary to evaluate the lighting of a scene.

==Shutter Drive Modes==
Shutter drive modes determine the way the camera will react when the shutter button is pressed. The T5i/T6i both have: 
* '''Single Shooting''' will take a picture each time the shutter button is fully depressed. 
* '''Continuous Shooting''' will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down. The camera will take pictures as fast as the shutter mechanism and the data buffer will allow. (max. aprox. 3 shots/second) 
* '''Self Timer / Remote Control''' will allow the shutter to be released via wired or wireless remote, or, if the shutter button is depressed, take a single shot after 2 or 10 seconds. 
The T6i has some additional drive features that the T5i doesn’t: 
* '''Single silent shooting''' is single shooting with less sound 
* '''Silent continuous shooting''' is continuous shooting with less sound 
* '''Self-timer: Continuous''' Press the up and down arrow keys to set the number of multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set number of multiple shots will be taken. 

==Image Size and Quality==
All Rebels have a number of image size and quality options. In most cases, the best option is to shoot at the highest resolution and quality possible, but space and processing limitations can make high-resolution images impractical.
===RAW Images===
Raw images are a direct feed from the camera's image sensor. Due to this, Raw files are extremely large and versatile. Raw image files have far better dynamic range than JPEG image files. Settings such as ISO and White balance can be changed during post processing, because Raw image files do not bake info into the image.

===JPEG Images===
JPEG images are compressed image files that save memory space by removing some of the detail and dynamic range from photographs. Canon Rebels apply a noise reduction process during the creation of JPEG images, which can make images look smoother in low-ISO situations, but can create a large amount of digital artifacts in high-ISO images. The T5i and T6i both have various resolution and quality settings for JPEG image capture.

=== Image-recording Quality Settings for the Canon Rebel T5i ===
[[File:Media Loan- Image Quality T5i.png|none|thumb|800x800px]]

==Menu System==
<gallery>
File:T2iMenu.jpg|T2i Menu Screen
File:T2iMenuNav.jpg|Menu Navigation Buttons
</gallery>
The full menu system of the Rebels can be accessed by pressing the '''MENU''' button on the back of the camera by the viewfinder. Image quality settings, picture style customization, memory management, screen brightness, and more are controlled from within the main menu. Use the cross keys to navigate the menu. Use the '''SET''' button to choose the highlighted option. At any time you can return to the main menu by pressing the '''MENU''' button again, or the home screen by halfway depressing the '''shutter release'''.

==Quick Exposure Settings Guide==
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the T5i/T6i. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder (enable with the depth-of-field preview button) and the LCD screen. The main ways to adjust exposure settings is with the top scroll wheel, the touch screen, set and cross keys, and the ISO and Av buttons. 
The exposure settings can be adjusted in multiple ways: 
* '''Exterior buttons:''' In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. To adjust the shutter speed, scroll back and forth with the top wheel. Aperture can be changed while holding down the Av button and scrolling with the top wheel. To adjust the ISO, press the ISO button (located on top of the camera near the mode dial) and then use the scroll wheel to make a selection. 
* '''Q Menu (Live View Off):''' Enable the Q menu by turning off Live View. You can then adjust exposure settings in manual shooting modes. Press the Q button to enable selections and set button to go into specific settings. You can use the touch screen instead of buttons, as well as the exterior buttons. 
* '''Live View:''' Enable the manipulation of the exposure settings in Live View by pressing the INFO button. Multiple depressions of INFO will enable various settings. Once engaged, you can use the touch screen or exterior buttons. 

== Putting your Media onto a Computer ==
There are two ways to put photos and videos onto a computer from you camera. 
* '''SD card:''' Remove the SD card from your camera. Use a card reader from media loan to connect it to the computer via a USB mini to USB A cable. a folder should pop up automatically to the computer desktop, or be seen in the computer's file management system like Apples “Finder”. Remember to “eject” the folder before disconnecting the SD card.
* '''Direct connection:''' Connect your camera to the computer using a USB mini to USB A cable. the cable connects to a socket on your camera labeled “A/V out Digital” behind a rubber flap. Once connected turn on you camera and open a photo viewing software like Apples “Photos” desktop application. Within the application, your photos from the camera should be available as a folder. It should work similarly on the equivalent Windows photo application.
[[Category:Media_Loan]]

Zoom H4n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test

2020-01-31T17:27:48Z

Williaas: /* Operational Proficiency */

===Zoom H4N===
'''Proficiency Questions'''
===='''Written Test'''====
Complete this written portion on a separate sheet of paper before arriving for your operational proficiency. The answers can be found in the operating guides for the '''[[Zoom H4n Audio Recorder Operating Guide|Zoom H4N]]'''. 
# What is the point of formatting the recorder before you record audio?
# Why is it not unnecessary to turn off the internal mic for input?
# What are the steps you must follow in order to import your files onto a computer for editing for both recorders?
# Describe how to set the date and time on the H4n.
# Name and describe the 4 modes on the H4n.
# What kind of mic configuration does the H4n utilize?
# What is the extent of your financial responsibility for the recorders when you check them out from Media Loan?
====Operational Proficiency====
(TO BE DONE DURING YOUR SCHEDULED APPOINTMENT )
* Turn recorder on.
* Demonstrate how to navigate through the menus of the recorder.
* Format the recorder correctly and prepare for recording.
* Set the proper record fie size.
* Demonstrate how to change the mic angels from 90 to 120 and back on the H4n.
* Plug preferred mic to correct input. Select input setup from the menu.
* Record 30 seconds of audio.
* Connect headphones or speakers to line-out and playback your file.
* Demonstrate the difference between pausing and stoping a recording.
* Connect USB from the recorder to a laptop provided by Media Loan.
* Show that you understand how to import your audio files from the recorder to the computer.
[[category:Media Loan]]

State and Local Government- Separating Audio from Video Files

2020-01-30T20:19:55Z

Williaas:

== Using Adobe Media Encoder ==

=== Use this method if you are wanting to just separate a video and file. If you are wanting to make a selection from the video and then export only the audio, you will need to use Premiere Pro. ===
*Launch the Adobe Media Encoder application that is part of the Adobe Creative Cloud Suite.
*Locate the file you are wanting to separate the video from the audio and drag it into the '''Queue''' panel in the Media Encoder.
[[File:MediaEncoder DragtoQueue.png|alt=Drag Files to Media Encoder Queue Panel |none|thumb|700x700px|
*
]]

*Toggle the triangle beside the blue text under '''Format''' and select '''mp3'''.

[[File:MediaEncoder Format.png|alt=Change your format to mp3. |none|thumb]]
*Click on the blue text under the '''Output File''' and rename your file if needed and verify where the file is saving on your local computer.
[[File:MediaEncoder Output.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]
[[File:MediaEncoder Save.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]
*Start the export process by clicking the green triangle.
[[File:MediaEncoder Start.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]

*After the export, open your file to verify that the export was successful.
*You can then import this audio file into '''Audacity'''.

== Using Adobe Premiere Pro ==

=== Use this method if you are wanting to make a selection from the video and then export only a selection of audio. ===
# Import the file you are wanting to use by selecting the '''File Menu > Import''' > and select your video.
# Double click on the video in your '''Project Panel''' which will open it in the '''Source Monitor'''.
# Scrub through your footage in the Source Monitor by dragging the blue playhead or use play and stop (can use the spacebar or controls within the panel).
# Once the playhead is at the frame you would like your clip to begin, pause your playback and type "i". This will set an "in-point" or your new clip boundary.
# Play ahead until you find the frame where you are wanting your selection end, pause and type "o" to set an "out-point." *Note: Feel free to give yourself extra room on either side of your selection as excess can be trimmed in Audacity.
# Once you have completed your selection, put your cursor on the '''Waveform Icon''' (if moused over this will say '''Drag Audio Only''') and hold down your cursor while dragging from this icon into the '''Timeline Panel''' and then release your cursor.
# This will open your audio file in your Timeline.
# Now you can export this file by going '''File > Export > Media'''.
# This will open the Premiere Export Dialog Box.
# Change the format to '''MP3''', check to see where your file is saving clicking on the blue text by '''Output File''' and '''save''', and then hit '''export'''.
# After the export, open your file to verify that the export was successful.
# You can then import this audio file into '''Audacity'''.

[[Category:2019-2020]]

State and Local Government- Separating Audio from Video Files

2020-01-30T20:16:45Z

Williaas: /* Use this method if you are wanting to make a selection from the video and then export only a selection of audio. */

== Using Adobe Media Encoder ==

=== Use this method if you are wanting to just separate a video and file. If you are wanting to make a selection from the video and then export only the audio, you will need to use Premiere Pro. ===
*<blockquote>Launch the Adobe Media Encoder application that is part of the Adobe Creative Cloud Suite.</blockquote>
*<blockquote>Locate the file you are wanting to separate the video from the audio and drag it into the '''Queue''' panel in the Media Encoder.</blockquote>
[[File:MediaEncoder DragtoQueue.png|alt=Drag Files to Media Encoder Queue Panel |none|thumb|700x700px|
*
]]

*<blockquote>Toggle the triangle beside the blue text under '''Format''' and select '''mp3'''.</blockquote>

[[File:MediaEncoder Format.png|alt=Change your format to mp3. |none|thumb]]
*<blockquote>Click on the blue text under the '''Output File''' and rename your file if needed and verify where the file is saving on your local computer.</blockquote>
[[File:MediaEncoder Output.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]
[[File:MediaEncoder Save.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]
*<blockquote>Start the export process by clicking the green triangle.</blockquote>
[[File:MediaEncoder Start.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]

*<blockquote>After the export, open your file to verify that the export was successful.</blockquote>
*<blockquote>You can then import this audio file into '''Audacity'''.</blockquote>

== Using Adobe Premiere Pro ==

=== Use this method if you are wanting to make a selection from the video and then export only a selection of audio. ===
# Import the file you are wanting to use by selecting the '''File Menu > Import''' > and select your video.
# Double click on the video in your '''Project Panel''' which will open it in the '''Source Monitor'''.
# Scrub through your footage in the Source Monitor by dragging the blue playhead or use play and stop (can use the spacebar or controls within the panel).
# Once the playhead is at the frame you would like your clip to begin, pause your playback and type "i". This will set an "in-point" or your new clip boundary.
# Play ahead until you find the frame where you are wanting your selection end, pause and type "o" to set an "out-point." *Note: Feel free to give yourself extra room on either side of your selection as excess can be trimmed in Audacity.
# Once you have completed your selection, put your cursor on the '''Waveform Icon''' (if moused over this will say '''Drag Audio Only''') and hold down your cursor while dragging from this icon into the '''Timeline Panel''' and then release your cursor.
# This will open your audio file in your Timeline.
# Now you can export this file by going '''File > Export > Media'''.
# This will open the Premiere Export Dialog Box.
# Change the format to '''MP3''', check to see where your file is saving clicking on the blue text by '''Output File''' and '''save''', and then hit '''export'''.
# After the export, open your file to verify that the export was successful.
# You can then import this audio file into '''Audacity'''.

[[Category:2019-2020]]

State and Local Government- Separating Audio from Video Files

2020-01-30T20:13:20Z

Williaas:

== Using Adobe Media Encoder ==

=== Use this method if you are wanting to just separate a video and file. If you are wanting to make a selection from the video and then export only the audio, you will need to use Premiere Pro. ===
*<blockquote>Launch the Adobe Media Encoder application that is part of the Adobe Creative Cloud Suite.</blockquote>
*<blockquote>Locate the file you are wanting to separate the video from the audio and drag it into the '''Queue''' panel in the Media Encoder.</blockquote>
[[File:MediaEncoder DragtoQueue.png|alt=Drag Files to Media Encoder Queue Panel |none|thumb|700x700px|
*
]]

*<blockquote>Toggle the triangle beside the blue text under '''Format''' and select '''mp3'''.</blockquote>

[[File:MediaEncoder Format.png|alt=Change your format to mp3. |none|thumb]]
*<blockquote>Click on the blue text under the '''Output File''' and rename your file if needed and verify where the file is saving on your local computer.</blockquote>
[[File:MediaEncoder Output.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]
[[File:MediaEncoder Save.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]
*<blockquote>Start the export process by clicking the green triangle.</blockquote>
[[File:MediaEncoder Start.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]

*<blockquote>After the export, open your file to verify that the export was successful.</blockquote>
*<blockquote>You can then import this audio file into '''Audacity'''.</blockquote>

== Using Adobe Premiere Pro ==

=== Use this method if you are wanting to make a selection from the video and then export only a selection of audio. ===
# Import the file you are wanting to use by using the '''File Menu > Import''' > and select your video.
# Double click on the video in your '''Project Panel''' which will open it in the '''Source Monitor'''.
# Scrub through your footage in the Source Monitor by dragging the blue playhead or use play and stop (can use the spacebar or controls within the panel).
# Once the playhead is on at the place you would like your clip to begin, pause your playback and type "i". This will set an "in-point" or your new clip boundary.
# Play ahead until you find the frame where you are wanting your selection end and type "o" to set an "out-point." *Note: Feel free to give yourself extra room on either side of your selection as excess can be trimmed in Audacity.
# Once you have completed your selection, put your cursor on the '''Waveform Icon''' (if moused over this will say '''Drag Audio Only''') and hold down your cursor while dragging from this icon into the '''Timeline Panel.'''
# This will open your audio file in your Timeline.
# Now you can export this file by going '''File > Export > Media'''.
# This will open the Premiere Export Dialog Box.
# Change the format to MP3, check to see where your file is saving clicking on the blue text by Output File and save, and then hit export.
# After the export, open your file to verify that the export was successful.
# You can then import this audio file into '''Audacity'''.

[[Category:2019-2020]]

State and Local Government- Separating Audio from Video Files

2020-01-30T19:42:09Z

Williaas: /* Use this method if you are wanting to just separate a video and file. If you are wanting to make a selection from the video and then export only the audio, you will need to use Premiere Pro. */

State and Local Government- Separating Audio from Video Files

2020-01-30T19:41:05Z

Williaas:

== Using Adobe Media Encoder ==

==== Use this method if you are wanting to just separate a video and file. If you are wanting to make a selection from the video and then export only the audio, you will need to use Premiere Pro. ====
*<blockquote>Launch the Adobe Media Encoder application that is part of the Adobe Creative Cloud Suite.</blockquote>
*<blockquote>Locate the file you are wanting to separate the video from the audio and drag it into the '''Queue''' panel in the Media Encoder.</blockquote>
[[File:MediaEncoder DragtoQueue.png|alt=Drag Files to Media Encoder Queue Panel |none|thumb|700x700px|
*
]]

*<blockquote>Toggle the triangle beside the blue text under '''Format''' and select '''mp3'''.</blockquote>

[[File:MediaEncoder Format.png|alt=Change your format to mp3. |none|thumb]]
*<blockquote>Click on the blue text under the '''Output File''' and rename your file if needed and verify where the file is saving on your local computer.</blockquote>
[[File:MediaEncoder Output.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]
[[File:MediaEncoder Save.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]
*<blockquote>Start the export process by clicking the green triangle.</blockquote>
[[File:MediaEncoder Start.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]

*<blockquote>After the export, open your file to verify that the export was successful.</blockquote>
*<blockquote>You can then import this audio file into '''Audacity'''.</blockquote>

[[Category:2019-2020]]

State and Local Government- Separating Audio from Video Files

2020-01-30T19:39:05Z

Williaas:

== Using Adobe Media Encoder ==

==== Use this method if you are wanting to just separate a video and file. If you are wanting to make a selection from the video and then export only the audio, you will need to use Premiere Pro. ====
* Launch the Adobe Media Encoder application that is part of the Adobe Creative Cloud Suite.
* Locate the file you are wanting to separate the video from the audio and drag it into the '''Queue''' panel in the Media Encoder.
[[File:MediaEncoder DragtoQueue.png|alt=Drag Files to Media Encoder Queue Panel |none|thumb|700x700px|
*
]]

* Toggle the triangle beside the blue text under '''Format''' and select '''mp3'''.

[[File:MediaEncoder Format.png|alt=Change your format to mp3. |none|thumb]]
* Click on the blue text under the '''Output File''' and rename your file if needed and verify where the file is saving on your local computer.
[[File:MediaEncoder Output.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]
[[File:MediaEncoder Save.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]
* Start the export process by clicking the green triangle.
[[File:MediaEncoder Start.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]

* After the export, open your file to verify that the export was successful.
* You can then import this audio file into '''Audacity'''.

[[Category:2019-2020]]

State and Local Government- Separating Audio from Video Files

2020-01-30T19:36:21Z

Williaas:

== Using Adobe Media Encoder ==
Use this method if you are wanting to just separate a video and file. If you are wanting to make a selection and then export only the audio, you will need to use Premiere Pro.
* Launch the Adobe Media Encoder application that is part of the Adobe Creative Cloud Suite.
* Locate the file you are wanting to separate the video from the audio and drag it into the '''Queue''' panel in the Media Encoder.

[[File:MediaEncoder DragtoQueue.png|alt=Drag Files to Media Encoder Queue Panel |none|thumb|700x700px|
*
]]

* Toggle the triangle beside the blue text under '''Format''' and select '''mp3'''.

[[File:MediaEncoder Format.png|alt=Change your format to mp3. |none|thumb]]
* Click on the blue text under the '''Output File''' and rename your file if needed and verify where the file is saving on your local computer.
[[File:MediaEncoder Output.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]
[[File:MediaEncoder Save.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]
* Start the export process by clicking the green triangle.
[[File:MediaEncoder Start.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]

* After the export, open your file to verify that the export was successful.
* You can then import this audio file into '''Audacity'''.

[[Category:2019-2020]]

File:MediaEncoder Start.png

2020-01-30T19:34:00Z

Williaas:

State and Local Government- Separating Audio from Video Files

2020-01-30T19:33:25Z

Williaas: /* Using Adobe Media Encoder */

== Using Adobe Media Encoder ==
Use this method if you are wanting to just separate a video and file. If you are wanting to make a selection and then export only the audio, you will need to use Premiere Pro.
* Launch the Adobe Media Encoder application that is part of the Adobe Creative Cloud Suite.
* Locate the file you are wanting to separate the video from the audio and drag it into the '''Queue''' panel in the Media Encoder.
[[File:MediaEncoder DragtoQueue.png|alt=Drag Files to Media Encoder Queue Panel |none|thumb|700x700px|
*
]]
* Toggle the triangle beside the blue text under '''Format''' and select '''mp3'''.
[[File:MediaEncoder Format.png|alt=Change your format to mp3. |none|thumb]]
# Click on the blue text under the '''Output File''' and rename your file if needed and verify where the file is saving on your local computer.
[[File:MediaEncoder Output.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]
[[File:MediaEncoder Save.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]
# Start the export process by clicking the green triangle.
# After the export, open your file to verify that the export was successful.
# You can then import this audio file into '''Audacity'''.

[[Category:2019-2020]]

File:MediaEncoder Save.png

2020-01-30T19:25:25Z

Williaas:

File:MediaEncoder Output.png

2020-01-30T19:24:34Z

Williaas:

File:MediaEncoder Format.png

2020-01-30T19:24:05Z

Williaas:

File:MediaEncoder DragtoQueue.png

2020-01-30T19:23:38Z

Williaas:

State and Local Government- Separating Audio from Video Files

2020-01-30T19:19:27Z

Williaas: Created page with "== Using Adobe Media Encoder == Use this method if you are wanting to just separate a video and file. If you are wanting to make a selection and then export only the audio, y..."

== Using Adobe Media Encoder ==
Use this method if you are wanting to just separate a video and file. If you are wanting to make a selection and then export only the audio, you will need to use Premiere Pro.
# Launch the Adobe Media Encoder application that is part of the Adobe Creative Cloud Suite.
# Locate the file you are wanting to separate the video from the audio and drag it into the '''Queue''' panel in the Media Encoder.
# Toggle the triangle beside '''Format''' and select '''mp3'''.
# Click on the blue text under the '''Output File''' and rename your file if needed and verify where the file is saving on your local computer.
# Start the export process by clicking the green triangle.
# After the export, open your file to verify that the export was successful.
# You can then import this audio file into '''Audacity'''.

[[Category:2019-2020]]

Mediaworks- Editing Sound for Film

2020-01-28T23:42:11Z

Williaas:

== Audio Editing Workflow ==

=== Basic Audio Editing in Premiere Pro ===

==== Syncing Audio from Dual Recording ====
Move all your audio and video recordings that need to be synced into a bin called '''Merged Clips'''

Open a video clip in the '''Source Monitor''' window by double clicking on the clip and find the exact frame where the sync clap hits and set either an '''I''' for an '''In Point''' or a '''M''' for a '''Marker'''

Open an audio clip in the Source Monitor window and find the exact part of the waveform where the sync clap hits and set either an '''I''' for an '''In Point''' or a '''M''' for a '''Marker'''

Go to the '''Merge Clips bin''' in the '''project panel''' and select both clips by dragging a box over the two recordings, or selecting one and then holding shift to select the other one

Right click and select '''Merge Clips''' > This opens a '''Merge Clip dialogue box''' > '''Rename''' your merged clip > Select your '''Sync Point''': either In Points or Clip Marker based on what you used > '''DO NOT''' use the '''audio time code''' from the clip > '''DO NOT''' remove the bad audio from the AV clips. They can help make sure everything is synced properly and you may want to mix them into to your audio. You can always choose to remove them later

==== Stereo Tracks to Mono in Premiere Pro ====
Premiere defaults to a stereo mode, if you have 2 channel recordings

Select your audio '''clip''' in the timeline > right click and select '''Modify''' > '''Audio Channels'''

Under the '''Clip Channel Format''' > '''Select Mono'''

If the Left and the Right Channel need to be '''two independent Mono tracks'''

under '''Number of Audio Clips''' change the number to '''2''' > Under the '''Media Source Channel''' Select '''L Ch. 1''' and '''R Ch. 2''' > select '''OK'''

'''OR'''

Go to The '''Effects Panel > Audio Effects > Fill Left with Right or Fill Right with Left''' (depending on which channel is empty)

=== Basic Editing ===
<blockquote>Once you get you video edit completed begin to work '''non-destructively''' with your audio</blockquote>
* Turn down the audio that isn’t your primary or main mic capture, but don’t delete it
* These other tracks can be used for mixing later in the process
* Begin to make adjustments to match the audio levels of different clips with one another

* Use the '''rolling edit tool (n)''' to adjust your edit points for smoothest audio cuts, make sure to hold down '''Option''' and click into the audio track, so only the audio track is selected. Otherwise the video track would be selected as well.

* Initially, adjust clip volume by the using the clip volume line tool in the timeline, as right clicking on a clip to '''adjust audio gains''' changes the source clip, which is a '''destructive edit.'''

=== Essential Sound Panel ===
* Simplify and streamline audio tasks
* Anything applied in the Essential Sound Panel in Premiere Pro transfer to Audition '''without any loss of quality'''
* A way to '''non-destructively edit'''
* All changes applied through the Essential Sound Panel can be viewed as their '''plug-ins in the Effects Control Panel'''

==== To Use Essential Sound Panel ====
Select a clip > Select kind of clip Dialogue > Music > SFX > Ambience

==== Unify loudness in your audio ====
1. In the Essential Sound panel, select the clip type as Dialogue, Music, SFX, or Ambience.

2. To make the loudness level uniform throughout the clip, expand Unify Loudness and click Auto Match. The loudness level (in LUFS) to which Audition auto-matched your clip appears below the Auto Match button.

==== Repair a dialogue track ====
If your clip contains dialogue audio data, you can use the options under the Dialogue tab in the Essential Sound panel to repair the sound by reducing noise, rumble, hum, and ‘ess’ sounds.

1. Add the audio clip to an empty track in a multitrack session.

2. Select the audio clip and in the Essential Sound panel, select the clip type as Dialogue.

3. Select the Repair Sound checkbox and expand the section.

4. Select the checkbox for the property that you want to change, and use the slider to adjust the level of the following properties between 0 and 10:

• '''Reduce Noise''': Reduce the level of unwanted noises in the background, such as studio floor sounds and microphone background noise, and clicks. The proper amount of noise reduction depends upon the type of background noise and the acceptable loss in quality for the remaining signal.

• '''Reduce Rumble''': Reduce the rumble noise--very low-frequency noise that ranges below the 80 Hz range, for example, noise produced by a turntable motor or an action camera.

• '''DeHum''': Reduce or eliminate Hum—noise consists of a single frequency, in 50 Hz range (common in Europe, Asia, and Africa) or 60 Hz range (common in North and South America). For example, electrical interference due to power cables laid too close to the audio cables can use such noise. You can select the hum level depending on the clip.

• '''DeEss''': Reduce harsh, high-frequency ess-like sounds. For example, sibilance in vocal recordings that cause s-sounds created by breathing or air movement between the microphone and the singer’s mouth.

==== Improve the clarity of your dialogue track ====
Improving the clarity of the dialogue track in your sequence has dependency on a variety of factors because of the variations in volume and frequency of the human voice that range between 50Hz and 2kH and the contents of the other tracks that go with it. Some of the common methods used for improving dialogue audio clarity are compressing or expanding the dynamic range of the recording, adjusting the frequency response of the recording, and processing the enhancing voices.

1. Add the audio clip to an empty track in a multitrack session.

2. Select the clip and in the Essential Sound panel, select the clip type as Dialogue.

3. Select the Improve Clarity checkbox and expand the section.

4. Select the checkbox for the property that you want to change, and use the slider to adjust the level of the following properties between 0 and 10:

1. Dynamics: Change the impact of the recording by compressing or expanding the dynamic range of your recording. You can change the level from natural to focused.

2. EQ: Reduce or boost selected frequencies in your recording. You can choose from a list of EQ presets that you can readily test on your audio and use and adjust the amount using the slider.

Note: To edit an EQ preset, select a preset, click the Edit icon. The Effect-Graphic Equalizer dialog box displays the graphic equalizer that you can adjust during playback, and save the changes.

3. Enhance speech: Select the dialogue as Male or Female to process and enhance it at the appropriate frequency.
Working with Sound effects clips

==== To add SFX and ambience to your audio ====
Audition allows you to create artificial sound effects for your audio. SFX helps you create illusions such as the music originating from a particular position in the stereo field or an ambience of a room or field with appropriate reflections and reverberation.

1. Add the audio clip to an empty track in a multitrack session.

2. Select the audio clip and choose Window > Essential Sound > SFX.

3. To set reverb effect, switch on the Reverb knob under Creative.

4. In the Preset box, select a Reverb preset that suits your needs.

5. To manually adjust the SFX elements during playback:

1. To add the desired level of reflection and reverberation, adjust the Amount slider.

2. To set the origin of the sound at a particular position in the stereo field, adjust the Position slider under Pan.

3. To set stereo width at an ideal position depending on your composition, switch on the Width knob under Stereo Width and adjust the slider.

==== Creating presets ====
Professional Audition users can create presets for the benefit of the users and projects that work on a similar set of audio assets to ensure consistency and to save time. You can create audio presets for particular type of sound, such as dialogue, music, SFX, or Ambience, or create effects presets for EQ, Reverb for SFX, and Reverb for Ambience.

To create a preset

1. In the Essential Sound panel, click the panel menu and choose Master Template View.

2. Click the + icon next to the preset dropdown, for example, Dialogue, EQ, or Reverb.

3. Change the desired settings and click Save settings as a preset button next to the Presets dropdown.

4. Type a name for the new preset and click OK. The new preset is listed under the audio or effect type it was created for.

Note:

Presets are coupled to their selected master templates. Selecting a new master template for a preset or creating a new master template give you another preset selection and different sound settings.

=== Workflow from Premiere to Audition ===
'''Edit''' > '''Edit in Adobe Audition''' > '''Sequence''' > '''Rename''' the file so it is clear in your workflow > the '''Path''' will automatically put a folder called '''Adobe Audition Interchange''' in the same folder where your '''Premiere Project''' files are saved

'''Selection- Entire Sequence''' > '''Video- Send through Dynamic Link''' > '''Audio Handles''' – Default is 1 seconds – Pull this out as far as you can (9.99 seconds) this gives you more flexibility to extend clips in Audition > '''Deselect Render Audio Clip Effects''' if you don’t want any of your initial audio effect work in Premiere to carry over (non-destructive) > '''Select Render Audio Clip Effects''' if you want your Premiere audio effects to transfer (destructive) > Select '''Send Clip Volume Keyframe Metadata''' (non-destructive) > Select '''Open in Adobe Audition''' > Select '''OK'''

==== Check to the properties of the video to make sure the '''frame rate''' matches the '''Adobe Audition Settings''' ====
If the video frame rate is '''29.97fps''' > Select '''Adobe Audition CC''' > '''Preferences''' > '''Time Display''' > '''SMPTE 29.97fps''' > '''OK'''
The Timeline Display should match > If it doesn’t right click on it > '''Time Display''' > and set it to match '''SMPTE 29.97fps'''

==== Organize the Tracks ====
Rename the Tracks:
Dialogue '''(DX)'''
Effect '''(FX)'''
Music '''(MX)'''
Room Tone

==== Stem Routing: ====
Make a New Bus track for each track
'''Multitrack''' > '''Track''' > Add '''Stereo Bus Track''' (opt b)
Do this for each track type
Rename the Busses:

DX Stem
FX Stem
MX Stem
Room Tone Stem

To Route:
Pull down the track far enough to see the output of the track which will be set to '''Master''' > Select the '''output bus''' > Select your '''Bus''' > Leave your '''bus output''' to '''Master'''

=== Final Audio Mix Workflow ===
==== I. Select the best audio for your mix ====
Any clips you decide not to use you can move to a Junk track and mute them. Shift + drag locks clips in their timecode

==== II. Match individual clips to their adjacent clips ====
Refine edit points for the '''trim tool''' > Apply '''crossfade''' > Select the '''Clip''' menu > '''Fade Out''' > '''Crossfade''' > the Crossfade Icon will let you adjust the length and shape of the crossfade

You can turn on '''Automatic Crossfade''' under the '''Clip''' menu as well

Avoid gaps or blank spaces in your mix

Add '''Crossfades, Fade In,''' and '''Fade Out''' to smooth our transitions

==== III. Add Ambient Sound Effects to make the sonic world more believable and interesting ====

Layering ambiences makes more depth and realism in your scene

==== IV. Add Sync Sound Effects ====

Use Markers or your eyes to line up actions in the footage with sync sound effects

==== V. Noise Reduction ====

1. '''Tonal noise and hum'''- Continuous, constant hum, like refrigerator and ventilators

2. '''Broadband noise'''- All over the frequency spectrum. Air conditioning or traffic noise

3. '''Intermittent noise problems'''- Digital clicks and pops, Lavalier mic hits, birds, boom pole bumps

===== '''Removing tonal noise and hum''' =====
Double click on the affected clip to open it in the Waveform editor > Look at the audio in the Frequency Spectral View > Use the paintbrush tool > Draw a selection around the problem noise > Hit the space bar to play the selection > Turn down the decibels, often you can’t remove it totally as other needed noise is in the space

You can improve the Spectral View Resolution under Adobe Audition > Preferences > Spectral Display > Spectral Resolution

===== '''Removing a hum''' =====
If you are trying to remove a hum, like an electoral hum, that is around 60 or 120 hertz

Double click on the clip to open it in the '''Waveform Editor''' > '''Effects''' > '''Noise Reduction Restoration''' > '''Dehummer''' (make sure that you are in the Spectral view so you can identify the frequency range that is causing issues)

In the plug-ins presets you can take out 120 hertz. It will automatically give you a sharp EQ curve to cut out right at 120 hertz.

If you still hear the hum, check the Spectral view and look for another frequency that could be generating the hum. Often you will also see a problem at 60 hertz as well.

Back in the '''Dehummer''' we can change our parameters to the preset “'''Remove 60 hertz and harmonics'''”. The next harmonic after 60 is 120.

The key to this kind of work is to identify where the tone lives through the '''Spectral View''' and lower those areas.

'''Reducing Broadband Noise'''

Open the clip in the '''Waveform editor''' by double clicking > Make sure it is in the '''Spectral View''' > '''Effects''' > Find an area of just the noise you are wanting to remove without any dialogue, breathing, etc. > Select it by dragging over the area > '''Noise Reduction / Restoration''' > '''Noise Reduction Process''' > '''Capture Sound Print'''

Then select the entire clip > You can preview these changes and adjust the parameters according > adjust both the Noise Reduction and Reduce by, under '''Advanced''', adjust '''Smoothing'''

When you are done adjusting the parameters > Make sure it is on the entire clip > Select '''Apply'''

The key is to get a good noise print and work the settings until what you end up with is better even if it's slightly better than what you started with.

===== '''Intermittent Noise Problems: Clicks, pops, and scratches''' =====
Very common for '''lavalier'''

Open the '''Effects Rack''' panel > '''Select Clip Effects''' > Select the '''lightning bolt icon''' at the bottom left of the window to turn on the '''pre-render''' track setting
Select the affected clips > '''Effects''' > '''Noise Reduction / Restoration''' > '''Automatic Click Remover''' > It will open as many dialogue boxes as clips were selected > Start with the '''heavy reduction preset''' in the Automatic Click Remover dialogue box

If you can isolate the pops, clicks, and scratches, Select the area with the '''Marque''' tool in the '''Waveform editor''' > '''Effects''' > '''Auto Heal Selection''' (this tool looks around for audio that might match and heals the selection)

'''Spot Healing Brush''' does a similar thing > Draw over your problem area

==== Equalization ====
Can be very beneficial for dialogue

'''Mixer''' > Go to their track effect insert > Select the arrow > '''Filter and EQ''' > '''Parametric Equalizer''' > '''HP''' (high pass) move to 75hz (human voice is most likely above this) > Gain Slope 48db > '''LP''' (low pass) 15000Hz > more gradual slope on higher frequencies 6db

'''Cmd + drag''' lets you copy and move an effect

==== Making Global changes to tracks ====
Pull the track down > Toggle down on '''Read''' > '''Show Envelopes''' > '''Volume''' > Set keyframes for your changes
This can be done for muting, panning, and EQs

=== Finalizing your Mix ===

'''Stereo Mixdown'''

File > Export > Multitrack Mixdown > if you’re at 32-bit, go to 24-bit, OK

'''Steam Export'''

File > Export > Multitrack Mixdown > Mixdown Options > Uncheck Stereo Master > Select the Buses

'''To Move to Premiere Pro'''

File > Export to Adobe Premiere Pro > Export Tracks as a Stem > Busses as a Stem > Open Premiere Pro > Copy to Active Sequence > New Audio Track > OK > Remove or mute the unwanted tracks from the Premiere Project

[[Category:2019-2020]]

Mediaworks- Editing Sound for Film

2020-01-28T23:16:45Z

Williaas:

Olympus LS-100 Proficiency Test

2020-01-23T00:58:34Z

Williaas:

==== WRITTEN TEST ====
Answers may be found in the [[Olympus LS-100 Multi-Track PCM Recorder Operating Guide]]
Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. Call 867-6253 if you have any questions.
# What is the point of formatting the internal memory of the recorder before you record audio?
# What are the steps you take in order to format the recorder correctly?
# What is the built in mic configuration on the recorder?
# What sub menus does the device offer in its menu system?
# What is the "Low Cut Filter"?
# How do you keep the display from turning off?
# What are the steps to enable the recorder two use to XLR inputs?
# How do you set the Time & Date of your files?
# Write the steps to insert a SD card.
# What is the extent of your financial responsibility when you checkout equipment from Media Loan?

==== OPERATIONAL PROFICIENCY ====
(TO BE DONE DURING YOUR SCHEDULED APPOINTMENT )
# Turn the recorder on.
# Demonstrate how to navigate through the menus of recorder.
# Format the recorder correctly and prepare for recording.
# Connect headphones or speakers to line-out and playback your track.
# Plug preferred microphone to correct input.
# Set appropriate record levels for microphone.
# Record 30 seconds of audio.
# Demonstrate the difference between pausing and continuing to record and stopping and to create a new file when recording.
# Erase track.
# Show that you understand how to import your audio files from the recorder to the computer.
[[category:Media Loan]]

Interns- Media Pedagogy

2020-01-13T21:09:38Z

Williaas:

Interns-- Professionalism and Email

2020-01-13T21:09:15Z

Williaas:

== Include a Clear, Direct Subject Line ==
Examples of a good subject line include "Meeting date changed on 9/7/18," "Quick question about your presentation on instructional media," or "Sick on 9/8/18."

This helps conversation threads be organized and clear.

In that vein, do not change subjects in emails, even if it means you need to send multiple emails. For example, if you are needing to tell your supervisor you will be ok for a doctor's appointment, don't use this email to also ask about an unrelated work question.

== Use a Professional Email Address ==
If you work for an organization, you should use your organization email address. But if you use a personal email account--whether you are self-employed or just like using it occasionally for work-related correspondences ---you should be careful when choosing that address.

You should always have an email address that conveys your name so that the recipient knows exactly who is sending the email. Never use email addresses that are not appropriate for use in the workplace. Your email should only be about the subject line.

== Include a Signature Block ==
Provide your reader with some information about you. Generally, this would state your full name, title, the company name, and your contact information, including a phone number. Use the same font, type size, and color as the rest of the email.

== Use Professional Salutations ==
Don't use laid-back, colloquial expressions like, "Hey you guys."

Hey is a very informal salutation and generally it should not be used in the workplace. Use Hi or Hello instead.

Don't shorten anyone's name. Say "Hi Michael," unless you're certain he prefers to be called "Mike." Be sensitive about pronouns, don't assume. And if you see someone's preferred name in "" please honor this.

== Use Exclamation Points Sparingly ==
If you choose to use an exclamation point, use only one to convey excitement.

== Be Cautious with Humor ==
Humor can easily get lost in translation without the right tone or facial expressions. In a professional exchange, it's better to leave humor out of emails unless you know the recipient well. Also, something that you think is funny might not be funny to someone else.

== Know that People from Different Cultures and Backgrounds Speak and Write Differently ==
Miscommunication can easily occur because of cultural and background differences, especially in the writing form when we can't see one another's body language. Be aware that different cultures and backgrounds communicate in different way. Some folks from different cultures and backgrounds want to get to know you before doing business with you. Therefore, they may be more personal in their writings. On the other hand, some cultures and people prefer to get to the point very quickly. It is useful to respect and expect different communication styles.

== Reply to Your Emails--Even if the Email wasn't Intended for you ==
It's difficult to reply to every email message ever sent to you, but you should try to. This includes when the email was accidentally sent to you, especially if the sender is expecting a reply. A reply isn't necessary but serves as good email etiquette, especially if this person works in the same area as you.

Here's an example reply: "I know you're very busy, but I don't think you meant to send this email to me. And I wanted to let you know so you can send it to the correct person."

== Proofread Every Message ==
Your mistakes won't go unnoticed by the recipients of your email. And, depending upon the recipient, you may be judged for making them.
Don't rely on spell-checkers. Read and re-read your email a few times, preferably aloud, before sending it off.

== Double-Check that you've Selected the Correct Recipient ==
Pay careful attention when typing a name from your address book on the email's "To" line. It's easy to select the wrong name, which can be embarrassing to you and to the person who receives the email by mistake.

== Keep Tabs on your Tone ==
To avoid misunderstandings, read your message out loud before hitting send. If it sounds harsh to you, it will sound harsh to the reader.

For best results, avoid using unequivocally negative words ("failure," "wrong," or "neglected"), and always say "please" and "thank you."

== Nothing is Confidential--So Write Accordingly ==
A basic guideline is to assume that others will see what you write, so don't write anything you wouldn't want everyone to see. A more liberal interpretation: Don't write anything that would be ruinous to you or hurtful to others.
[[Category:2019-2020]]

Interns - Web Portfolios

2020-01-13T21:08:51Z

Williaas:

__NOTOC__
=== Why a build a personal website? ===
* stake out your personal space/name on the web
* a stable location you control to point your social media accounts to

====What to use to build a site?====
*What is [http://wordpress.org/ WordPress]? How is [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/ blogs.evergreen.edu] different from [http://wordpress.com/ wordpress.com] different from [https://wordpress.org/ wordpress.org]?
* Alternatives include [https://www.squarespace.com/ Squarespace], [https://www.tumblr.com/ Tumblr], [http://dropr.com/ dropr] and [http://www.wix.com/ Wix]

===Multimedia and Fine Art portfolio examples: ===
* http://www.femmefatale.paris/en
* http://y78.fr
* http://www.taubaauerbach.com/
* http://rameyfilms.com/index.html (evergreen alumna)
* http://cathydelacruz.com/ ((evergreen alumna)
* [http://www.youngjerks.com/ Young Jerks—Dan Cassaro and Dan Christofferson]
* [http://davidrudnick.org David Rudnick]
* [http://jenmussari.com/ Jen Mussari] (see also: [http://www.ghostlyferns.com/ Ghostly Ferns])
* [http://www.debbiemillman.com/ Debbie Millman]

=== Audio portfolio examples: ===
* http://brianbinningaudio.com/
* http://www.gameaudiogirl.com/
* http://zacharyquarles.com/blog/
* http://chloestamper.com/

===Create a WordPress Site at Evergreen===
As an Evergreen student, you have access to create a site at '''http://blogs.evergreen.edu''' and get support. This is a great opportunity to explore the waters of creating your own website in preparation for managing your own after graduation.

'''To get started check out the [[WordPress Tutorial]]'''

====Suggested themes for portfolio sites:====
Always make sure themes are responsive and will look good across all device sizes.
* Baskerville
* Hatch
* Hemingway
* Twenty Fifteen
* [http://demo.graphpaperpress.com/fullscreen/ Fullscreen]
*[http://demo.graphpaperpress.com/onesie/ Onesie]
*[http://demo.graphpaperpress.com/snaps/ Snaps]
* Wilson

====Embedding media====
*[[Soundcloud - WordPress| Adding sound files using soundcloud]]

===Tips for building your web site===
* Design it with your intended audience always in mind.
* What are your goals for your site?
* Look at how other's in your field are organizing their sites. Are there elements you like/dislike? Are there patterns you see being used across multiple sites in your field?
* Is it easy to view your work? Find your relevant experience.

====How will people contact/connect with you?====
* Consider connecting with social media tools like Twitter, Facebook, LinkedIn or Instagram.
* Make sure you present a professional image; create social media accounts or pages for your professional persona separate from your personal accounts.
* Have you included a resume? make sure it be viewed in full on the site and then optionally downloaded as a PDF.
* Protect your privacy. Use contact forms whenever possible so you don't have to reveal your email address or phone number.

====Wireframe Activity====
With the provided Post-it Notes, map out the skeletal framework of your site.
* Image your site on a mobile device
* How do viewers navigate your content?

===What about after graduation?===
*[[What happens to my blog when I graduate?]]

=== Getting your own website===
==== Securing your own custom domain name====
Every website has a unique web address. Best practices for choosing a custom domain name:
* short, descriptive, easily communicated, not easily confused with other websites
* first and last name .com
* domain registration happens via a domain registrar. Often times web hosts will also offer domain registration. Coupling domain registration and web hosting is the easiest way to manage as each will have to be renewed annually.
* What about some of the new TLDs like .name, .design

====Web Hosting and Editing Platforms====
Web hosts are the folks who host your website on their internet connected web servers. They can host simple html files but now, more often they additionally host web editing platforms such as WordPress, Wix or Squarespace. Before you commit to a web host:
* Create a trial account and make sure it feels easy to use and meets all of your site's requirements.
* Add up all of the recurring costs (domain + web hosting)
* some platforms are Open Source such as WordPress which means if you don't like your web host you can always move your code to another server
* some platforms are proprietary such as Squarespace - web sites built here will have limited export functionality

====Get Found====
=====Register your site with the major search engines=====
Getting your site found by the major search engines can take time. By manually registering it can speed up the process.
* [http://www.google.com/submityourcontent/website-owner/ Google] [Submit your URL]
* [http://search.yahoo.com/info/submit.html Yahoo] [Submit your URL]
* [http://www.bing.com/toolbox/submit-site-url Bing] [Submit your URL]

====Is my site successful?====
A great way to measure how many people visit your site is to set up a [https://analytics.google.com Google Analytics account]. You'll then need to use a plugin or manually add the Google Analytics code into your site.

====Getting Geeky====
* learn html/css
* consider coding your own site using [https://css-tricks.com/snippets/css/complete-guide-grid/ Grid]
** Resources for learning: [http://cssgridgarden.com/ CSS Grid Garden], [http://flexboxfroggy.com/ Flexbox Froggy]

[[Category:2019-2020]]

Interns- Interviewing with Confidence

2020-01-13T21:08:34Z

Williaas:

== Goals: ==
* Know critical steps in preparing for an interview
* Know which questions to be prepared for
* Understand strategies for offering complete responses
* Know which loose ends to keep in mind
<blockquote>Our culture rewards self-deprecation, not talking about oneself positively. This can be really hard habit to break in interviews.</blockquote>

== What activities do you do when? ==
* Research the Organization
* Google General Interview Questions
* Practice Answering Questions for the Interviewer(s)
* Prepare Location and Confirm Transportations
* Choose Clothes and Outfit
* Personal Grooming and Hygiene
<blockquote>It doesn’t matter the order you do these, as long as you do all of them</blockquote>

== Preparation Tips: ==

===== '''Research''' =====
* Website (Mission, Values)
* Social Media (this gives you a current look at what they are doing)

===== '''Clothes''' =====
* Feel Professional? You’re good.
* Being overdressed isn’t an issue but being under is

===== '''Google & Practice''' =====
* Work place or project stories for examples
* Go through the job description

===== '''Prepare Questions''' =====
* You’re interviewing them too!
* Prepare thoughtful questions with answers you couldn’t find elsewhere
* Focus on things you can’t find in the job description or the website
* The goal is to stump them

===== '''Tips for Practice''' =====
* Record yourself—watch out for verbal fillers (like, um, and stuff)
* Write out responses
* Practice responses in the mirror
* Schedule a Mock Interview

===== '''Don’t forget the details…''' =====
* Map the location
* Have a spare resume in a folder

== I’m Here…Now What? ==
<blockquote>Tell me about yourself? The hardest easy question in the game</blockquote>

===== '''What I think they mean:''' =====
* Where I’m from/my childhood
* How old I am
* My hobbies (could maybe include work related hobbies)

===== '''They really mean:''' =====
* What you studied
* Why you applied and what gets you excited about the position
* Skillsets you can apply to the position (Why this is the right job for you now)

== What are your strengths/weaknesses: ==

===== '''Strengths:''' =====
* Focus on good experiences
* Things you did well
* Things your proud of
* Don’t self-deprecate

===== '''Weaknesses:''' =====
* Make sure your weakness is not a core function of the job
* Spin as a work in progress
* Have tangible improvement strategies

== Tell Me About a Time When… ==
* Conflict with a colleague
* Multiple projects, too little time
* Worked as part of a team to achieve a goal

== Use the '''STAR''' method: ==
<blockquote>Focus on yourself, what you did, your role…</blockquote>
* '''S''': Explain the Situation
* '''T''': Describe your role or Task
* '''A''': The Action you took
* '''R''': The Results of your action
<blockquote>Think about accountability and be very thoughtful about how you talk about colleagues and supervisors.</blockquote>

== How to Show Up ==
* Bring yourself to the interview
* They’ll notice if you’re anyone else
* Be early and keep your phone out of sight
* Make them laugh, have a conversation
* Have a ritual that will help you relax

[[Category:2019-2020]]

Interns- Curriculum Development Process

2020-01-13T21:07:15Z

Williaas:

== Curriculum Foundations ==
=== Enduring Idea ===
An enduring idea in curriculum is a concept that has drawn attention of people over time. These are issues that extend beyond specific disciplines. Some examples of enduring ideas:
* Identity
* Power
* Conflict
* Ritual
* Humans and Nature
* Change
* Communication

A enduring idea is very generate and unlimited. Often key concepts or questions can provide the impetus and focus for the development of the instruction. Enduring ideas help teachers to avoid activities that aren't connected to lifelong learning. It's a way to link academia subject matter to life-focused issues.

It can be impractical and unrealistic to just select an enduring idea as the starting point to curriculum. More often, curriculum design starts from looking at media artwork, a learning objective, a piece of technology or equipment, personal interest, etc. Often you need to search for the enduring idea.

Curriculum is inherently about choice. We want it to be '''relevant''' and '''diverse'''.

=== Relevance: ===
* Student interest and need
* Media understanding and processes
* Contemporary culture

=== Diversity: ===
An awareness of the range of possibilities in a particular area regarding ideas, issues, themes, artists, artwork, artifacts, or groups that are studied.

== Getting Started: ==
=== 1. Choosing the Enduring Idea ===
* Select an enduring idea with the following criteria in mind
* What is the importance of the idea?
* What is the appropriateness of the idea for students? How does it relate to their present and future interests and needs?
* How does it relate to contemporary culture?
* How is the enduring idea represented in the media arts?

=== 2. Writing a Rationale: ===
Explain why the enduring idea is important for the learning and for your students in particular. Rationales motivate you to examine whether or not the idea is worth teaching and if it is relevant to students.

=== 3. Unpacking the Enduring Idea: Key Concepts ===
Think about what is implied by the enduring idea considering diverse perspectives. Then generate a list of key concepts that might be associated with the enduring idea.

An example--enduring idea: "Communication is an essential aspect of what it means to be human."

Key Concepts:
* Communication can be verbal and nonverbal.
* Communication requires interpretation.
* Communication can be direct or indirect.
* Communication can be understood or misunderstood.
* Communication can be literal or symbolic.
* Communication evolves.

Review your list and decide what seems most important. Often many key concepts can be collapsed into a single concept.

=== 4. Formulating Essential Questions ===
Essential questions synthesize key concepts and focus curriculum. The enduring idea provides broad focus, but individual lessons need specific direction. Key concepts are useful, but may represent too many ideas to keep in mind at once. Essential questions fall between the generality of the enduring idea and the specificity of key concepts.

An example:
* What counts as communication?
* Why is communication often difficult?
* Why is communication important?

You often only need one essential question, but could have several.

=== 5. Inserting Learning Objectives ===
Learning objectives identify what students will understand or be able to do (skills) as a result of the lesson.

What do you want your students to know and be able to do as a result of the lesson? These should be more specific than key concepts and enduring ideas.

Examples:
* Students will understand how media influences contemporary communication.
* Students will understand how Skype or Zoom can be used as a tool of global communication.
* Students will understand how to communicate a narrative through using only visual media.
* Students will understand how to communicate a narrative through using only audio.

=== 6. How do I teach this? ===
Once the work of identifying enduring ideas, key concepts, and essential questions has been completed, objectives have been outlined, educators must ask "How will students demonstrate that they understand what it is that we wish them to understand?" We need tasks that provide evidence of student learning.

Our lesson plans need design and sequence strategies that that move students from where they are currently in terms of knowledge and understanding to a place where they will demonstrate an enriched understanding through the performance task.

==== A Few Instructional Strategies for Designing Instruction: ====
# Selecting Content for Relevance and Diversity
Sometimes it makes sense, early in the process of curriculum planning, to select artworks, histories, objects, or sites that, when considered carefully for their meaning, will assist in developing an understanding of the enduring ideas and key concepts. For example, if we were wanting to instruct on rotoscope technique, there are many example artists we could show. There are so many possible artworks, artists, objects, histories, and sites from which to select that educators can't possibly hope to introduce students to all that exists. We need to make a choice. Ask yourself about student interest and need, ask yourself what is important about the process, and is the process acknowledging contemporary practices? Make sure that your have researched a range of artists, artworks, etc.

2. Guidance from the Media Content

How can we assist students in making meaningful artworks tied to the concept of the lesson?

So for the technical lectures in this group, if the educator produces original media content for their instruction, then the is directly receiving guidance from media content. To take it a step further, if the technical process, use of equipment, software, etc, requires the learner to engage with a guided practice or hands-on portion of the workshop, then the lesson assists your intern cohort in the making of meaningful work. If the process is tied an enduring idea, that anchors that art making in meaning.

3. Class Discussions

Class discussion is so basic and necessary that sometimes teachers fail to recognize the need to plan discussions. As educator, you should consider ways to encourage group participation by all members of the group.

4. Promoting Student Reflection

With the goal of helping students to become more active, independent, and self-regulating learners, we need to assist them in becoming aware of how they learn best. They need to be aware of their own learning styles and what factors help or impede their learning. This can be done orally and informally or in a more formal written way. Think of the self evaluations, if they were a flexible format.

==== A Check on Content and Instruction ====
* Does this lesson address knowledge and skills in a logical sequence?
* When the concepts/key terms are introduced, are they sufficiently developed?
* Do the enduring ideas, key concepts, and essential questions provide focus for the instruction?
* Are the necessary resources/background materials for teaching the lesson listed?
* Do activities and questions provide substantive engagement for students?
* Are connections to real-life situations provided?
* Are there opportunities provided for practice of new skills and concepts?
* Are there opportunities for learners to ask questions?
* Are there opportunities for student-directed discussions?
* Are their opportunities for student self-reflection?
[[Category:2019-2020]]

Canon Rebel T5i/T6i/T7i Gear Guide

2020-01-02T23:48:54Z

Williaas:

'''A proficiency test is required to check out this camera.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide, and complete the written portion of the [[Canon Rebel Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes. 
*[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/8/8b/Rebel_t5i_guide.pdf Canon Rebel T5i Complete Manual]

== Caring for the Canon Rebel==
Media Loan has a limited number of Canon Rebel cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''':
 
Drop this camera
 
Point camera toward Sun.
 
Submerge this camera in water
 
Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
 
Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car
 
Store this camera in excessive heat or cold
 
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
 
Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
 
Use excessive physical force 
Touch the mirror or sensor
 
Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

== New Features to the T5i/T6i==
The newer Rebel models have a separate video mode switch, a flip-out LCD monitor, touch screen functionality, and a depth-of-field preview button.

===LCD Flip-out Screen===
The T5i/T6i are the only cameras at Media Loan that have a flip-out LCD monitor. To flip the monitor out, pull on the right side of the screen. When it is swung out you can rotate it up, down, or over 180 degrees to face the subject. This allows you to view your Live View image or exposure settings from various angles.

===Touch Screen===
The LCD screen monitor on the T5i/T6i has touch screen capabilities, unlike the other Rebel models available at Media Loan. You can use the touch screen to navigate the MENU, adjust settings, and change exposure. It is automatically activated in Live View mode and the MENU; with Live View off you will need to press the Q button to activate the touch screen and navigate the Q Menu. Touch screen can be enabled/disabled in the MENU. The touch shutter function, activated in Live View mode, enables you to take a picture by simply tapping the LCD screen with your finger.

==T5i/T6i Differences==
The Canon Rebel T5i and T6i are very similar in design and functionality. They are both equipped with the same censor, the APS-C 332.3mm2 and have the same ISO range of 100-12,800. Media Loan has very few T6i’s available. Here are the major differences between these models: 
* Megapixels: 18MP – T5i vs. 24.2MP – T6i 
* Pixels: T5i – Bigger pixels, better in low-light vs. T6i – More pixels, higher resolution 
* Even though they have the same ISO range, the T6i handles noise better 
* The T6i has more Auto-Focus (AF) points 
They have slight differences in exterior buttons, explained below.

==T5i Diagrams==
<gallery>
File:T5i front.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i back.jpg|T5i front diagram
File:T5i Dial.jpg|T5i front diagram
</gallery>

==T6i Diagrams==
<gallery>

</gallery>
[[File:Canon T6i Front Diagram.png|none|thumb|186x186px|T6i Front Diagram ]]
[[File:Canon Rebel T6i Back Diagram.png|none|thumb|177x177px|T6i Back Diagram]]
[[File:Canon T6i Mode Dial.png|none|thumb|178x178px]]

==Battery==
To insert a battery into the Canon Rebel:
# Open the battery door located on the bottom of the camera by pulling on the latch and swinging the door open.
# Align the battery attachment on the camera to the attachment in the slot.
# Slide the battery into place and lock it in.
# Close the battery door.
 

The battery will only fit in one way, so if it does not seem to be working, the battery is not oriented correctly. When the camera is powered off, it takes several seconds to clean the sensor. Because of this, make sure that the "Sensor Cleaning" logo is no longer on the screen before removing the battery. 
To charge the battery, slide it into the provided charger and then plug the charger into a standard 120 VAC outlet. '''Do not charge more than 24 hours. Do not use any charger other than the one provided with the camera.''' 

===Battery Life===
The Canon Rebel shows charge level in three stages: "Battery OK", "Battery Low", and "Needs to be Charged". To conserve battery life, the Rebel will go into a sleep mode after a period of disuse with default settings. To wake the camera, press the shutter button down halfway. If you know you will not be using the camera, it is best to fully turn the camera off.

==Camera Memory==
The T5i/T6i can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards. Most Media Loan Rebels will come with a 16 gigabyte card already in the camera. If you wish to use your own card, make sure the speed rating is at least Class 4 for RAW photos, and Class 10 45mb/s for video. 
To switch memory cards, open the door on the back of the camera's hand grip, and press the back of the memory card. The card will pop out far enough to grab the back. Remove the card. To insert a new card, make sure it is oriented correctly, and insert the new memory card until it stops.

==Canon Rebel Lenses==
The Canon Rebel will accept any Canon EF of EF-S bayonet lenses. Media Loan has several different zoom and prime lenses that can be checked out alongside a Canon Rebel. Prime lenses (fixed focal length) are recommended for faster apertures and picture quality, while zoom lenses are recommended for changing shooting settings, or long telephoto applications.
===Removing and Replacing Lenses===
'''Please do not remove the included kit lens from the camera unless you intend to attach a different lens immediately.''' On the Canon Rebel, there is a half-circle shaped button on the right side of the lens mount (viewed from the front of the camera). To remove the lens, press this button, and turn the lens approximately 90 degrees clockwise. To attach a new lens, find the guide mark on the lens body. If it is an EF lens, the guide mark will be a red circle. If the lens is EF-S, the guide mark will be a white square. Line up the guide mark with the matching mark on the Canon rebel body, set the lens into the mount, and turn it approximately 90 degrees counter clockwise until it locks into place.
===Auto / Manual Focus Switch===
The Canon Rebel uses an in-lens focusing system, which is switched on and off on the body of the lens. Regardless of the settings on the camera body, if the switch on the lens is set to MF (Manual Focus), the camera will not perform AF (Auto Focus) functions.
===Image Stabilization===
Some canon lenses feature an optical IS (Image Stabilization) function. This can be useful for shooting fast-moving hand-held shots, shots in low-light environments, etc. Because the IS is optical, it will not deteriorate the quality of the image as digital image stabilization does. However, using the IS feature on a lens will drain the battery much faster. Due to power consumption concerns, we recommend that the IS be turned off when shooting from a tripod, or at high enough shutter speeds that hand movement will not be a concern. The IS controlled on the lens body, and if the lens has an IS feature, the switch will be next to the AF/MF switch next to the lens mount.

==Controls==
The T6i has two added buttons on top of the camera body, above the Mode Dial: DISP. and one for Auto-Focus (AF) functionality. The DISP. button will turn the LCD screen on/off when Live View is disengaged, and the AF allows for quick access to Auto-Focus settings.
===Mode Dial===
<gallery>

</gallery>
====A-DEP====
A-DEP (Automatic DEPth of Field) mode on the Canon Rebel is designed to maximize focus across a picture, and is primarily intended for landscapes or large groups of people. A-DEP must be used with AF turned on, as the camera will use the AF sensor array to search through the frame for the distance of all subjects, then determine aperture and shutter values to create a depth of field that will keep all subjects in focus. A-DEP is not recommended for moving subjects, portraits, or shots where foreground and background de-focus is desired. The only controllable exposure settings in A-DEP mode are ISO and Exposure compensation.

====M====
M (Manual) mode offers full control over all features on the Canon Rebel. All exposure settings and picture styles must be changed by the user. This allows for the most creative control over the camera, but also demands an understanding of the camera's features, and basic principals of photography. In manual mode, the shutter speed is controlled by the dial next to the shutter release button. Aperture is controlled by the same dial while the AV button on the back of the camera is pressed. ISO can be set by pressing the button on the top of the camera between the Mode Dial and the Shutter Speed Dial. While in M, you can choose Auto ISO.

====Av====
Av (Aperture Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed to let the user choose aperture values, and automatically determine shutter speed for correct exposure. While in Av mode, the dial next to the shutter button will control the aperture. ISO is controlled the same way as in M mode, and shutter speed is determined by the camera. Av mode is designed to let the user control depth of field in a shot (to customize deep of shallow focus), but may not be good for high speed subjects, as the camera may use a slow shutter speed to acquire correct exposure.

====Tv====
Tv (Shutter Priority Auto-Exposure) mode is designed for photography where shutter speed is crucial. In Tv mode, the shutter speed is controlled with the dial next to the shutter button. In this mode, the user determines shutter speed, and the camera will automatically determine an aperture value for correct exposure. ISO is controlled in the same manner as in M mode. Tv mode is designed for applications such as sports photography, where depth of field is not particularly important, but fast shutter speeds to minimize motion blur are desired.

====P====
P (Program Auto-Exposure) mode allows the camera to control both the shutter speed and the aperture value. Users may still set the ISO as in M mode. In P mode, the user may change the shutter / aperture combination by turning the dial next to the shutter button. When the user changes the shutter / aperture setting like this, the camera will automatically change both shutter speed and aperture value simultaneously to maintain correct exposure. This mode is good for shooting in rapidly changing environments, or learning how the combination of shutter and aperture change both exposure and visual elements within the picture.

====CA====
CA (Creative Auto) mode operates exactly like full automatic mode with several more user controlled options allowed. In CA mode, the user may turn the flash on or off, change exposure compensation, choose picture styles, and change the drive mode of the camera. All other values are locked to camera-control.

====Auto (Green Square)====
Auto mode locks all options into camera control. User cannot override any options on the camera, including exposure, picture style, or drive mode. Auto mode is not recommended for any shooting situation.

====Other Still Photo Modes====
The Canon Rebel has several specialized automatic modes, designed for various different applications. They mimic the manual control modes without giving the user any actual manual control of the camera. '''Flash Off''' mode runs like full auto, but locks out the flash. '''Portrait''' mode uses a wide aperture to defocus the background and emphasize the subject. '''Landscape''' mode uses a small aperture to create deep focus from the foreground to the background. '''Macro''' mode attempts to optimize exposure and shutter drive for close-up photography (NOTE: the close-focus distance of the rebel is determined by the lens, and will not change regardless of what mode the camera body is set to. To take photos with small subjects near the camera, check out a macro-specialized lens from Media Loan). '''Sports''' mode will use the fastest shutter speed possible to minimize motion blur in pictures. '''Night Portrait''' mode will fire the flash to get a clear photo of the foreground subject, and use a long shutter speed to capture the background. Although each of these modes has specific applications, manual camera modes will offer more control in any situation.

===Video Mode===
The T5i/T6i cameras have full-manual HD video functionality. Unlike other Rebel models at Media Loan, the video mode on the T5i/T6i is activated on the same switch '''near the Mode Dial as ON/OFF'''. This allows the user to easily change '''exposure modes with the mode dial''' while shooting video. 
Turn the switch to the video camera icon to engage video mode. The mirror will open, and live view will automatically activate '''(the Q menu is disabled in video mode)'''. To record or stop recording video, press the live view button. You can change the exposure and image settings the same way in video mode as in photo mode (exterior buttons, touch screen). You can also adjust image settings in the '''MENU'''. Pressing '''INFO''' will display more or less information.
===Aperture / Exposure Compensation Button===
The '''Aperture / Exposure Compensation''' button (Av +/-) allows control over the aperture while in manual shooting mode. While in other modes, the button controls exposure compensation, allowing the user to make the camera expose lighter or darker than the internal meter would under normal operation.

===Quick Control Button (Q) / Q Menu===
The '''Quick Control (Q)''' button allows camera settings to be controlled via the cross keys when the '''Q Menu''' is engaged. To use the quick control feature, turn off Live View and press the Q button. You can then use the cross keys to select the setting you wish to change.

===Display Button===
'''T6i ONLY'''. The '''Display''' (DISP) button on the camera will turn the the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the '''Display''' button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.

===Info Button===
The '''INFO''' button on the camera will turn the screen on and off during normal operation. When the camera is in video or live view mode, the INFO button will cycle through different options for viewing exposure information on the screen.
When Live View mode is engaged, the INFO button will display exposure settings on the LCD screen. Press the INFO button multiple times to display more or less settings.

===Depth-of-field Preview Button===
The aperture opening changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD screen, the depth of field will look narrow. Press the depth-of-field preview button (located on the camera body near the lens mount) to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the actual depth of field (range of acceptable focus). This will darken the viewfinder considerably. This button can also be used to display the exposure settings in the bottom of the viewfinder.

==Live View==
Both the T5i/T6i are capable of shooting in Live View mode. This will open up the mirror and the shutter in the camera body and display a live image from the camera's sensor on the screen. To turn live view on or off, press the button on the camera next to the eyepiece with the circular red Record logo and a small logo of the camera back. You can enable/disable Live View mode in the MENU.
While in Live View, auto focus will be severely limited. All video is shot in Live View mode. While the camera is in Live View, '''DO NOT''' point the camera at the sun, as the sensor is exposed and will be damaged. Note that the appearance of the image on the screen in live view mode does not reflect the brightness of the actual picture. Always use the meter or histogram, as the brightness of the LCD cannot be trusted.
While the camera is in video mode, live view mode will turn on automatically. In this case, the '''Live View''' button becomes the '''Record / Stop''' button for video recording.

==Metering Modes==
The Canon Rebels have built-in light meter systems. The metering modes measure the light of an image in order to determine whether or not it is properly exposed. The light meter is displayed in multiple places, including in the bottom of the viewfinder, in the Q Menu, and the bottom of the LCD screen in Live View mode. 
T5i/T6i both have four different modes to meter the lighting in a scene. 
* '''Evaluative Metering''' is the camera's standard metering mode. It is suited for most shooting situations, including some moderate back-lighting of a subject. 
* '''Partial Metering''' is effective when the background is significantly brighter or darker than the subject. 
* '''Center-Weighted Average Metering''' takes the average of lighting across the frame with slight preference given to lighting in the center of the frame. 
* '''Spot Metering''' meters from a small area in the center of the frame. Spot metering is the most accurate, but only accounts for a small part of the picture, so several meter readings may be necessary to evaluate the lighting of a scene.

==Shutter Drive Modes==
Shutter drive modes determine the way the camera will react when the shutter button is pressed. The T5i/T6i both have: 
* '''Single Shooting''' will take a picture each time the shutter button is fully depressed. 
* '''Continuous Shooting''' will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down. The camera will take pictures as fast as the shutter mechanism and the data buffer will allow. (max. aprox. 3 shots/second) 
* '''Self Timer / Remote Control''' will allow the shutter to be released via wired or wireless remote, or, if the shutter button is depressed, take a single shot after 2 or 10 seconds. 
The T6i has some additional drive features that the T5i doesn’t: 
* '''Single silent shooting''' is single shooting with less sound 
* '''Silent continuous shooting''' is continuous shooting with less sound 
* '''Self-timer: Continuous''' Press the up and down arrow keys to set the number of multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set number of multiple shots will be taken. 

==Image Size and Quality==
All Rebels have a number of image size and quality options. In most cases, the best option is to shoot at the highest resolution and quality possible, but space and processing limitations can make high-resolution images impractical.
===RAW Images===
Raw images are a direct feed from the camera's image sensor. Due to this, Raw files are extremely large and versatile. Raw image files have far better dynamic range than JPEG image files. Settings such as ISO and White balance can be changed during post processing, because Raw image files do not bake info into the image.

===JPEG Images===
JPEG images are compressed image files that save memory space by removing some of the detail and dynamic range from photographs. Canon Rebels apply a noise reduction process during the creation of JPEG images, which can make images look smoother in low-ISO situations, but can create a large amount of digital artifacts in high-ISO images. The T5i and T6i both have various resolution and quality settings for JPEG image capture.

=== Image-recording Quality Settings for the Canon Rebel T5i ===
[[File:Media Loan- Image Quality T5i.png|none|thumb|800x800px]]

==Menu System==
<gallery>
File:T2iMenu.jpg|T2i Menu Screen
File:T2iMenuNav.jpg|Menu Navigation Buttons
</gallery>
The full menu system of the Rebels can be accessed by pressing the '''MENU''' button on the back of the camera by the viewfinder. Image quality settings, picture style customization, memory management, screen brightness, and more are controlled from within the main menu. Use the cross keys to navigate the menu. Use the '''SET''' button to choose the highlighted option. At any time you can return to the main menu by pressing the '''MENU''' button again, or the home screen by halfway depressing the '''shutter release'''.

==Quick Exposure Settings Guide==
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the T5i/T6i. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder (enable with the depth-of-field preview button) and the LCD screen. The main ways to adjust exposure settings is with the top scroll wheel, the touch screen, set and cross keys, and the ISO and Av buttons. 
The exposure settings can be adjusted in multiple ways: 
* '''Exterior buttons:''' In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. To adjust the shutter speed, scroll back and forth with the top wheel. Aperture can be changed while holding down the Av button and scrolling with the top wheel. To adjust the ISO, press the ISO button (located on top of the camera near the mode dial) and then use the scroll wheel to make a selection. 
* '''Q Menu (Live View Off):''' Enable the Q menu by turning off Live View. You can then adjust exposure settings in manual shooting modes. Press the Q button to enable selections and set button to go into specific settings. You can use the touch screen instead of buttons, as well as the exterior buttons. 
* '''Live View:''' Enable the manipulation of the exposure settings in Live View by pressing the INFO button. Multiple depressions of INFO will enable various settings. Once engaged, you can use the touch screen or exterior buttons. 

== Putting your Media onto a Computer ==
There are two ways to put photos and videos onto a computer from you camera. 
* '''SD card:''' Remove the SD card from your camera. Use a card reader from media loan to connect it to the computer via a USB mini to USB A cable. a folder should pop up automatically to the computer desktop, or be seen in the computer's file management system like Apples “Finder”. Remember to “eject” the folder before disconnecting the SD card.
* '''Direct connection:''' Connect your camera to the computer using a USB mini to USB A cable. the cable connects to a socket on your camera labeled “A/V out Digital” behind a rubber flap. Once connected turn on you camera and open a photo viewing software like Apples “Photos” desktop application. Within the application, your photos from the camera should be available as a folder. It should work similarly on the equivalent Windows photo application.
[[Category:Media_Loan]]

File:Media Loan T5i Image Quality.pdf

2020-01-02T23:40:32Z

Williaas: